1 | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
---|
2 | <!--
|
---|
3 | Copyright (C) 2006-2022 Oracle and/or its affiliates.
|
---|
4 |
|
---|
5 | This file is part of VirtualBox base platform packages, as
|
---|
6 | available from https://www.virtualbox.org.
|
---|
7 |
|
---|
8 | This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
|
---|
9 | modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
|
---|
10 | as published by the Free Software Foundation, in version 3 of the
|
---|
11 | License.
|
---|
12 |
|
---|
13 | This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
|
---|
14 | WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
---|
15 | MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
---|
16 | General Public License for more details.
|
---|
17 |
|
---|
18 | You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
---|
19 | along with this program; if not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses>.
|
---|
20 |
|
---|
21 | SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-3.0-only
|
---|
22 | -->
|
---|
23 | <!DOCTYPE chapter PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.5//EN"
|
---|
24 | "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.5/docbookx.dtd"[
|
---|
25 | <!ENTITY % all.entities SYSTEM "all-entities.ent">
|
---|
26 | %all.entities;
|
---|
27 | ]>
|
---|
28 | <chapter id="AdvancedTopics">
|
---|
29 |
|
---|
30 | <title>Advanced Topics</title>
|
---|
31 |
|
---|
32 | <sect1 id="autologon">
|
---|
33 |
|
---|
34 | <title>Automated Guest Logins</title>
|
---|
35 |
|
---|
36 | <para>
|
---|
37 | &product-name; provides Guest Addition modules for Windows, Linux,
|
---|
38 | and Oracle Solaris to enable automated logins on the guest.
|
---|
39 | </para>
|
---|
40 |
|
---|
41 | <para>
|
---|
42 | When a guest operating system is running in a virtual machine, it
|
---|
43 | might be desirable to perform coordinated and automated logins
|
---|
44 | using credentials passed from the host. Credentials are user
|
---|
45 | name, password, and domain name, where each value might be empty.
|
---|
46 | </para>
|
---|
47 |
|
---|
48 | <sect2 id="autologon_win">
|
---|
49 |
|
---|
50 | <title>Automated Windows Guest Logins</title>
|
---|
51 |
|
---|
52 | <para>
|
---|
53 | Windows provides a modular system login subsystem, called
|
---|
54 | Winlogon, which can be customized and extended by means of
|
---|
55 | so-called GINA (Graphical Identification and Authentication)
|
---|
56 | modules. In Windows Vista and later releases, the GINA modules
|
---|
57 | were replaced with a new mechanism called credential providers.
|
---|
58 | The &product-name; Guest Additions for Windows come with both, a
|
---|
59 | GINA and a credential provider module, and therefore enable any
|
---|
60 | Windows guest to perform automated logins.
|
---|
61 | </para>
|
---|
62 |
|
---|
63 | <para>
|
---|
64 | To activate the &product-name; GINA or credential provider
|
---|
65 | module, install the Guest Additions using the command line
|
---|
66 | switch <option>/with_autologon</option>. All the following
|
---|
67 | manual steps required for installing these modules will be then
|
---|
68 | done by the installer.
|
---|
69 | </para>
|
---|
70 |
|
---|
71 | <para>
|
---|
72 | To manually install the &product-name; GINA module, extract the
|
---|
73 | Guest Additions as shown in
|
---|
74 | <xref linkend="windows-guest-file-extraction" />, and copy the
|
---|
75 | <filename>VBoxGINA.dll</filename> file to the Windows
|
---|
76 | <filename>SYSTEM32</filename> directory. In the registry, create
|
---|
77 | the following key with a value of
|
---|
78 | <filename>VBoxGINA.dll</filename>:
|
---|
79 | </para>
|
---|
80 |
|
---|
81 | <screen>HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon\GinaDLL</screen>
|
---|
82 |
|
---|
83 | <note>
|
---|
84 | <para>
|
---|
85 | The &product-name; GINA module is implemented as a wrapper
|
---|
86 | around the <filename>MSGINA.DLL</filename> standard Windows
|
---|
87 | GINA module. As a result, it might not work correctly with
|
---|
88 | third-party GINA modules.
|
---|
89 | </para>
|
---|
90 | </note>
|
---|
91 |
|
---|
92 | <para>
|
---|
93 | To manually install the &product-name; credential provider
|
---|
94 | module, extract the Guest Additions as shown in
|
---|
95 | <xref linkend="windows-guest-file-extraction" /> and copy the
|
---|
96 | <filename>VBoxCredProv.dll</filename> file to the Windows
|
---|
97 | <filename>SYSTEM32</filename> directory. In the registry, create
|
---|
98 | the following keys:
|
---|
99 | </para>
|
---|
100 |
|
---|
101 | <screen>HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\
|
---|
102 | Authentication\Credential Providers\{275D3BCC-22BB-4948-A7F6-3A3054EBA92B}
|
---|
103 |
|
---|
104 | HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\CLSID\{275D3BCC-22BB-4948-A7F6-3A3054EBA92B}
|
---|
105 |
|
---|
106 | HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\CLSID\{275D3BCC-22BB-4948-A7F6-3A3054EBA92B}\InprocServer32</screen>
|
---|
107 |
|
---|
108 | <para>
|
---|
109 | All default values, the key named <literal>Default</literal>,
|
---|
110 | must be set to <literal>VBoxCredProv</literal>.
|
---|
111 | </para>
|
---|
112 |
|
---|
113 | <para>
|
---|
114 | Create the following string and assign it a value of
|
---|
115 | <literal>Apartment</literal>.
|
---|
116 | </para>
|
---|
117 |
|
---|
118 | <screen>HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\CLSID\{275D3BCC-22BB-4948-A7F6-3A3054EBA92B}\InprocServer32\ThreadingModel</screen>
|
---|
119 |
|
---|
120 | <para>
|
---|
121 | To set credentials, use the following command on a
|
---|
122 | <emphasis>running</emphasis> VM:
|
---|
123 | </para>
|
---|
124 |
|
---|
125 | <screen>$ VBoxManage controlvm "Windows XP" setcredentials "John Doe" "secretpassword" "DOMTEST"</screen>
|
---|
126 |
|
---|
127 | <para>
|
---|
128 | While the VM is running, the credentials can be queried by the
|
---|
129 | &product-name; login modules, GINA or credential provider, using
|
---|
130 | the &product-name; Guest Additions device driver. When Windows
|
---|
131 | is in <emphasis>logged out</emphasis> mode, the login modules
|
---|
132 | will constantly poll for credentials and if they are present, a
|
---|
133 | login will be attempted. After retrieving the credentials, the
|
---|
134 | login modules will erase them so that the above command will
|
---|
135 | have to be repeated for subsequent logins.
|
---|
136 | </para>
|
---|
137 |
|
---|
138 | <para>
|
---|
139 | For security reasons, credentials are not stored in any
|
---|
140 | persistent manner and will be lost when the VM is reset. Also,
|
---|
141 | the credentials are write-only. There is no way to retrieve the
|
---|
142 | credentials from the host side. Credentials can be reset from
|
---|
143 | the host side by setting empty values.
|
---|
144 | </para>
|
---|
145 |
|
---|
146 | <para>
|
---|
147 | Depending on the Windows guest version, the following
|
---|
148 | restrictions apply:
|
---|
149 | </para>
|
---|
150 |
|
---|
151 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
152 |
|
---|
153 | <listitem>
|
---|
154 | <para>
|
---|
155 | For <emphasis role="bold">Windows XP guests.</emphasis> The
|
---|
156 | login subsystem needs to be configured to use the classic
|
---|
157 | login dialog, as the &product-name; GINA module does not
|
---|
158 | support the Windows XP-style welcome dialog.
|
---|
159 | </para>
|
---|
160 | </listitem>
|
---|
161 |
|
---|
162 | <listitem>
|
---|
163 | <para>
|
---|
164 | <emphasis role="bold">Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8,
|
---|
165 | and Windows 10 guests.</emphasis> The login subsystem does
|
---|
166 | not support the so-called Secure Attention Sequence,
|
---|
167 | <literal>Ctrl+Alt+Del</literal>. As a result, the guest's
|
---|
168 | group policy settings need to be changed to not use the
|
---|
169 | Secure Attention Sequence. Also, the user name given is only
|
---|
170 | compared to the true user name, not the user friendly name.
|
---|
171 | This means that when you rename a user, you still have to
|
---|
172 | supply the original user name as Windows never renames user
|
---|
173 | accounts internally.
|
---|
174 | </para>
|
---|
175 | </listitem>
|
---|
176 |
|
---|
177 | <listitem>
|
---|
178 | <para>
|
---|
179 | Automatic login handling of the built-in
|
---|
180 | <emphasis role="bold">Windows Remote Desktop
|
---|
181 | Service</emphasis>, formerly known as Terminal Services, is
|
---|
182 | disabled by default. To enable it, create the following
|
---|
183 | registry key with a <literal>DWORD</literal> value of
|
---|
184 | <literal>1</literal>.
|
---|
185 | </para>
|
---|
186 |
|
---|
187 | <screen>HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Oracle\VirtualBox Guest Additions\AutoLogon</screen>
|
---|
188 | </listitem>
|
---|
189 |
|
---|
190 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
191 |
|
---|
192 | <para>
|
---|
193 | The following command forces &product-name; to keep the
|
---|
194 | credentials after they were read by the guest and on VM reset:
|
---|
195 | </para>
|
---|
196 |
|
---|
197 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata "Windows XP" VBoxInternal/Devices/VMMDev/0/Config/KeepCredentials 1</screen>
|
---|
198 |
|
---|
199 | <para>
|
---|
200 | Note that this is a potential security risk, as a malicious
|
---|
201 | application running on the guest could request this information
|
---|
202 | using the proper interface.
|
---|
203 | </para>
|
---|
204 |
|
---|
205 | </sect2>
|
---|
206 |
|
---|
207 | <sect2 id="autologon_unix">
|
---|
208 |
|
---|
209 | <title>Automated Linux and UNIX Guest Logins</title>
|
---|
210 |
|
---|
211 | <para>
|
---|
212 | &product-name; provides a custom PAM module (Pluggable
|
---|
213 | Authentication Module) which can be used to perform automated
|
---|
214 | guest logins on platforms which support this framework.
|
---|
215 | Virtually all modern Linux and UNIX distributions rely on PAM.
|
---|
216 | </para>
|
---|
217 |
|
---|
218 | <para>
|
---|
219 | For automated logins on Ubuntu, or Ubuntu-derived, distributions
|
---|
220 | using LightDM as the display manager. See
|
---|
221 | <xref linkend="autologon_unix_lightdm" />.
|
---|
222 | </para>
|
---|
223 |
|
---|
224 | <para>
|
---|
225 | The <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> module itself
|
---|
226 | <emphasis>does not</emphasis> do an actual verification of the
|
---|
227 | credentials passed to the guest OS. Instead it relies on other
|
---|
228 | modules such as <filename>pam_unix.so</filename> or
|
---|
229 | <filename>pam_unix2.so</filename> down in the PAM stack to do
|
---|
230 | the actual validation using the credentials retrieved by
|
---|
231 | <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename>. Therefore
|
---|
232 | <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> has to be on top of the
|
---|
233 | authentication PAM service list.
|
---|
234 | </para>
|
---|
235 |
|
---|
236 | <note>
|
---|
237 | <para>
|
---|
238 | The <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> module only supports the
|
---|
239 | <literal>auth</literal> primitive. Other primitives such as
|
---|
240 | <literal>account</literal>, <literal>session</literal>, or
|
---|
241 | <literal>password</literal> are not supported.
|
---|
242 | </para>
|
---|
243 | </note>
|
---|
244 |
|
---|
245 | <para>
|
---|
246 | The <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> module is shipped as part
|
---|
247 | of the Guest Additions but it is not installed and/or activated
|
---|
248 | on the guest OS by default. In order to install it, it has to be
|
---|
249 | copied from
|
---|
250 | <filename>/opt/VBoxGuestAdditions-<replaceable>version</replaceable>/other/</filename>
|
---|
251 | to the security modules directory. This is usually
|
---|
252 | <filename>/lib/security/</filename> on 32-bit Linux guests or
|
---|
253 | <filename>/lib64/security/</filename> on 64-bit Linux guests.
|
---|
254 | Please refer to your guest OS documentation for the correct PAM
|
---|
255 | module directory.
|
---|
256 | </para>
|
---|
257 |
|
---|
258 | <para>
|
---|
259 | For example, to use <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> with a
|
---|
260 | Ubuntu Linux guest OS and the GNOME Desktop Manager (GDM) to log
|
---|
261 | in users automatically with the credentials passed by the host,
|
---|
262 | configure the guest OS as follows:
|
---|
263 | </para>
|
---|
264 |
|
---|
265 | <orderedlist>
|
---|
266 |
|
---|
267 | <listitem>
|
---|
268 | <para>
|
---|
269 | Copy the <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> module to the
|
---|
270 | security modules directory. In this case,
|
---|
271 | <filename>/lib/security</filename>.
|
---|
272 | </para>
|
---|
273 | </listitem>
|
---|
274 |
|
---|
275 | <listitem>
|
---|
276 | <para>
|
---|
277 | Edit the PAM configuration file for GDM, found at
|
---|
278 | <filename>/etc/pam.d/gdm</filename>. Add the line
|
---|
279 | <literal>auth requisite pam_vbox.so</literal> at the top.
|
---|
280 | Additionally, in most Linux distributions there is a file
|
---|
281 | called <filename>/etc/pam.d/common-auth</filename>. This
|
---|
282 | file is included in many other services, like the GDM file
|
---|
283 | mentioned above. There you also have to add the line
|
---|
284 | <literal>auth requisite pam_vbox.so</literal>.
|
---|
285 | </para>
|
---|
286 | </listitem>
|
---|
287 |
|
---|
288 | <listitem>
|
---|
289 | <para>
|
---|
290 | If authentication against the shadow database using
|
---|
291 | <filename>pam_unix.so</filename> or
|
---|
292 | <filename>pam_unix2.so</filename> is desired, the argument
|
---|
293 | <literal>try_first_pass</literal> for
|
---|
294 | <filename>pam_unix.so</filename> or
|
---|
295 | <literal>use_first_pass</literal> for
|
---|
296 | <filename>pam_unix2.so</filename> is needed in order to pass
|
---|
297 | the credentials from the &product-name; module to the shadow
|
---|
298 | database authentication module. For Ubuntu, this needs to be
|
---|
299 | added to <filename>/etc/pam.d/common-auth</filename>, to the
|
---|
300 | end of the line referencing
|
---|
301 | <filename>pam_unix.so</filename>. This argument tells the
|
---|
302 | PAM module to use credentials already present in the stack,
|
---|
303 | such as the ones provided by the &product-name; PAM module.
|
---|
304 | </para>
|
---|
305 | </listitem>
|
---|
306 |
|
---|
307 | </orderedlist>
|
---|
308 |
|
---|
309 | <warning>
|
---|
310 | <para>
|
---|
311 | An incorrectly configured PAM stack can effectively prevent
|
---|
312 | you from logging into your guest system.
|
---|
313 | </para>
|
---|
314 | </warning>
|
---|
315 |
|
---|
316 | <para>
|
---|
317 | To make deployment easier, you can pass the argument
|
---|
318 | <literal>debug</literal> right after the
|
---|
319 | <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> statement. Debug log output
|
---|
320 | will then be recorded using syslog.
|
---|
321 | </para>
|
---|
322 |
|
---|
323 | <note>
|
---|
324 | <para>
|
---|
325 | By default, <command>pam_vbox</command> does not wait for
|
---|
326 | credentials to arrive from the host. When a login prompt is
|
---|
327 | shown, for example by GDM/KDM or the text console, and
|
---|
328 | <command>pam_vbox</command> does not yet have credentials it
|
---|
329 | does not wait until they arrive. Instead the next module in
|
---|
330 | the PAM stack, depending on the PAM configuration, will have
|
---|
331 | the chance for authentication.
|
---|
332 | </para>
|
---|
333 | </note>
|
---|
334 |
|
---|
335 | <para>
|
---|
336 | <command>pam_vbox</command> supports various guest property
|
---|
337 | parameters that are located in
|
---|
338 | <filename>/VirtualBox/GuestAdd/PAM/</filename>. These parameters
|
---|
339 | allow <command>pam_vbox</command> to wait for credentials to be
|
---|
340 | provided by the host and optionally can show a message while
|
---|
341 | waiting for those. The following guest properties can be set:
|
---|
342 | </para>
|
---|
343 |
|
---|
344 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
345 |
|
---|
346 | <listitem>
|
---|
347 | <para>
|
---|
348 | <literal>CredsWait</literal>: Set to 1 if
|
---|
349 | <command>pam_vbox</command> should start waiting until
|
---|
350 | credentials arrive from the host. Until then no other
|
---|
351 | authentication methods such as manually logging in will be
|
---|
352 | available. If this property is empty or gets deleted no
|
---|
353 | waiting for credentials will be performed and
|
---|
354 | <command>pam_vbox</command> will act like before. This
|
---|
355 | property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
356 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
357 | </para>
|
---|
358 | </listitem>
|
---|
359 |
|
---|
360 | <listitem>
|
---|
361 | <para>
|
---|
362 | <literal>CredsWaitAbort</literal>: Aborts waiting for
|
---|
363 | credentials when set to any value. Can be set from host and
|
---|
364 | the guest.
|
---|
365 | </para>
|
---|
366 | </listitem>
|
---|
367 |
|
---|
368 | <listitem>
|
---|
369 | <para>
|
---|
370 | <literal>CredsWaitTimeout</literal>: Timeout, in seconds, to
|
---|
371 | let <command>pam_vbox</command> wait for credentials to
|
---|
372 | arrive. When no credentials arrive within this timeout,
|
---|
373 | authentication of <command>pam_vbox</command> will be set to
|
---|
374 | failed and the next PAM module in chain will be asked. If
|
---|
375 | this property is not specified, set to 0 or an invalid
|
---|
376 | value, an infinite timeout will be used. This property must
|
---|
377 | be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
378 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
379 | </para>
|
---|
380 | </listitem>
|
---|
381 |
|
---|
382 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
383 |
|
---|
384 | <para>
|
---|
385 | To customize <command>pam_vbox</command> further there are the
|
---|
386 | following guest properties:
|
---|
387 | </para>
|
---|
388 |
|
---|
389 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
390 |
|
---|
391 | <listitem>
|
---|
392 | <para>
|
---|
393 | <literal>CredsMsgWaiting</literal>: Custom message showed
|
---|
394 | while pam_vbox is waiting for credentials from the host.
|
---|
395 | This property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
396 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
397 | </para>
|
---|
398 | </listitem>
|
---|
399 |
|
---|
400 | <listitem>
|
---|
401 | <para>
|
---|
402 | <literal>CredsMsgWaitTimeout</literal>: Custom message
|
---|
403 | showed when waiting for credentials by
|
---|
404 | <command>pam_vbox</command> has timed out. For example, they
|
---|
405 | did not arrive within time. This property must be set
|
---|
406 | read-only for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
407 | </para>
|
---|
408 | </listitem>
|
---|
409 |
|
---|
410 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
411 |
|
---|
412 | <note>
|
---|
413 | <para>
|
---|
414 | If a <command>pam_vbox</command> guest property does not have
|
---|
415 | the correct flag set (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>) the
|
---|
416 | property is ignored and, depending on the property, a default
|
---|
417 | value will be used. This can result in pam_vbox not waiting
|
---|
418 | for credentials. Consult the appropriate syslog file for more
|
---|
419 | information and use the <literal>debug</literal> option.
|
---|
420 | </para>
|
---|
421 | </note>
|
---|
422 |
|
---|
423 | <sect3 id="autologon_unix_lightdm">
|
---|
424 |
|
---|
425 | <title>&product-name; Greeter for Ubuntu/LightDM</title>
|
---|
426 |
|
---|
427 | <para>
|
---|
428 | &product-name; comes with a greeter module, named
|
---|
429 | <command>vbox-greeter</command>, that can be used with
|
---|
430 | LightDM. LightDM is the default display manager for Ubuntu
|
---|
431 | Linux and therefore can also be used for automated guest
|
---|
432 | logins.
|
---|
433 | </para>
|
---|
434 |
|
---|
435 | <para>
|
---|
436 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> does not need the
|
---|
437 | <command>pam_vbox</command> module described in
|
---|
438 | <xref linkend="autologon_unix"/>in order to function. It comes
|
---|
439 | with its own authentication mechanism provided by LightDM.
|
---|
440 | However, to provide maximum flexibility both modules can be
|
---|
441 | used together on the same guest.
|
---|
442 | </para>
|
---|
443 |
|
---|
444 | <para>
|
---|
445 | As with the <command>pam_vbox</command> module,
|
---|
446 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> is shipped as part of the
|
---|
447 | Guest Additions but it is not installed or activated on the
|
---|
448 | guest OS by default. To install
|
---|
449 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> automatically upon Guest
|
---|
450 | Additions installation, use the
|
---|
451 | <option>--with-autologon</option> option when starting the
|
---|
452 | <command>VBoxLinuxAdditions.run</command> file:
|
---|
453 | </para>
|
---|
454 |
|
---|
455 | <screen># ./VBoxLinuxAdditions.run -- --with-autologon</screen>
|
---|
456 |
|
---|
457 | <para>
|
---|
458 | For manual or postponed installation, copy the
|
---|
459 | <filename>vbox-greeter.desktop</filename> file from
|
---|
460 | <filename>/opt/VBoxGuestAdditions-<version>/other/</filename>
|
---|
461 | to the <filename>xgreeters</filename> directory, which is
|
---|
462 | usually <filename>/usr/share/xgreeters/</filename>. See your
|
---|
463 | guest OS documentation for the name of the correct LightDM
|
---|
464 | greeter directory.
|
---|
465 | </para>
|
---|
466 |
|
---|
467 | <para>
|
---|
468 | The <command>vbox-greeter</command> module is installed by the
|
---|
469 | &product-name; Guest Additions installer and is located in
|
---|
470 | <filename>/usr/sbin/</filename>. To enable
|
---|
471 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> as the standard greeter
|
---|
472 | module, edit the file
|
---|
473 | <filename>/etc/lightdm/lightdm.conf</filename> as follows:
|
---|
474 | </para>
|
---|
475 |
|
---|
476 | <screen>[SeatDefaults]
|
---|
477 | greeter-session=vbox-greeter</screen>
|
---|
478 |
|
---|
479 | <note>
|
---|
480 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
481 |
|
---|
482 | <listitem>
|
---|
483 | <para>
|
---|
484 | The LightDM server must be fully restarted in order for
|
---|
485 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> to be used as the
|
---|
486 | default greeter. As <literal>root</literal> on Ubuntu,
|
---|
487 | run <command>service lightdm --full-restart</command> or
|
---|
488 | restart the guest.
|
---|
489 | </para>
|
---|
490 | </listitem>
|
---|
491 |
|
---|
492 | <listitem>
|
---|
493 | <para>
|
---|
494 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> is independent of the
|
---|
495 | graphical session you choose, such as Gnome, KDE, or
|
---|
496 | Unity. However, <command>vbox-greeter</command> does
|
---|
497 | require FLTK 1.3 or later to implement its own user
|
---|
498 | interface.
|
---|
499 | </para>
|
---|
500 | </listitem>
|
---|
501 |
|
---|
502 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
503 | </note>
|
---|
504 |
|
---|
505 | <para>
|
---|
506 | There are numerous guest properties which can be used to
|
---|
507 | further customize the login experience. For automatically
|
---|
508 | logging in users, the same guest properties apply as for
|
---|
509 | <command>pam_vbox</command>. See
|
---|
510 | <xref linkend="autologon_unix" />.
|
---|
511 | </para>
|
---|
512 |
|
---|
513 | <para>
|
---|
514 | In addition to the previously mentioned guest properties,
|
---|
515 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> enables you to further
|
---|
516 | customize its user interface. The following guest properties
|
---|
517 | are located in the
|
---|
518 | <filename>/VirtualBox/GuestAdd/Greeter/</filename> directory:
|
---|
519 | </para>
|
---|
520 |
|
---|
521 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
522 |
|
---|
523 | <listitem>
|
---|
524 | <para>
|
---|
525 | <literal>HideRestart</literal>: Set to 1 if
|
---|
526 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> should hide the button to
|
---|
527 | restart the guest. This property must be set read-only for
|
---|
528 | the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
529 | </para>
|
---|
530 | </listitem>
|
---|
531 |
|
---|
532 | <listitem>
|
---|
533 | <para>
|
---|
534 | <literal>HideShutdown</literal>: Set to 1 if
|
---|
535 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> should hide the button to
|
---|
536 | shutdown the guest. This property must be set read-only
|
---|
537 | for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
538 | </para>
|
---|
539 | </listitem>
|
---|
540 |
|
---|
541 | <listitem>
|
---|
542 | <para>
|
---|
543 | <literal>BannerPath</literal>: Path to a
|
---|
544 | <filename>.PNG</filename> file to use as a banner image on
|
---|
545 | the top of the greeter. The image size must be 460 x 90
|
---|
546 | pixels, any bit depth. This property must be set read-only
|
---|
547 | for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
548 | </para>
|
---|
549 | </listitem>
|
---|
550 |
|
---|
551 | <listitem>
|
---|
552 | <para>
|
---|
553 | <literal>UseTheming</literal>: Set to 1 for turning on the
|
---|
554 | following theming options. This property must be set
|
---|
555 | read-only for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
556 | </para>
|
---|
557 | </listitem>
|
---|
558 |
|
---|
559 | <listitem>
|
---|
560 | <para>
|
---|
561 | <literal>Theme/BackgroundColor</literal>: Hexadecimal
|
---|
562 | RRGGBB color for the background. This property must be set
|
---|
563 | read-only for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
564 | </para>
|
---|
565 | </listitem>
|
---|
566 |
|
---|
567 | <listitem>
|
---|
568 | <para>
|
---|
569 | <literal>Theme/LogonDialog/HeaderColor</literal>:
|
---|
570 | Hexadecimal RRGGBB foreground color for the header text.
|
---|
571 | This property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
572 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
573 | </para>
|
---|
574 | </listitem>
|
---|
575 |
|
---|
576 | <listitem>
|
---|
577 | <para>
|
---|
578 | <literal>Theme/LogonDialog/BackgroundColor</literal>:
|
---|
579 | Hexadecimal RRGGBB color for the login dialog background.
|
---|
580 | This property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
581 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
582 | </para>
|
---|
583 | </listitem>
|
---|
584 |
|
---|
585 | <listitem>
|
---|
586 | <para>
|
---|
587 | <literal>Theme/LogonDialog/ButtonColor</literal>:
|
---|
588 | Hexadecimal RRGGBB background color for the login dialog
|
---|
589 | button. This property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
590 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
591 | </para>
|
---|
592 | </listitem>
|
---|
593 |
|
---|
594 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
595 |
|
---|
596 | <note>
|
---|
597 | <para>
|
---|
598 | The same restrictions for the guest properties above apply
|
---|
599 | as for the ones specified in the <literal>pam_vbox</literal>
|
---|
600 | section.
|
---|
601 | </para>
|
---|
602 | </note>
|
---|
603 |
|
---|
604 | </sect3>
|
---|
605 |
|
---|
606 | </sect2>
|
---|
607 |
|
---|
608 | </sect1>
|
---|
609 |
|
---|
610 | <sect1 id="adv-config-win-guest">
|
---|
611 |
|
---|
612 | <title>Advanced Configuration for Windows Guests</title>
|
---|
613 |
|
---|
614 | <sect2 id="sysprep">
|
---|
615 |
|
---|
616 | <title>Automated Windows System Preparation</title>
|
---|
617 |
|
---|
618 | <para>
|
---|
619 | Microsoft offers a system preparation tool called Sysprep, to
|
---|
620 | prepare a Windows system for deployment or redistribution. Some
|
---|
621 | Windows releases include Sysprep on the installation medium, but
|
---|
622 | the tool is also available for download from the Microsoft web
|
---|
623 | site. In a standard For most Windows versions, Sysprep is
|
---|
624 | included in a default installation. Sysprep mainly consists of
|
---|
625 | an executable called <command>sysprep.exe</command> which is
|
---|
626 | invoked by the user to put the Windows installation into
|
---|
627 | preparation mode.
|
---|
628 | </para>
|
---|
629 |
|
---|
630 | <para>
|
---|
631 | The Guest Additions offer a way to launch a system preparation
|
---|
632 | on the guest operating system in an automated way, controlled
|
---|
633 | from the host system. See
|
---|
634 | <xref linkend="guestadd-guestcontrol" /> for details of how to
|
---|
635 | use this feature with the special identifier
|
---|
636 | <literal>sysprep</literal> as the program to execute, along with
|
---|
637 | the user name <literal>sysprep</literal> and password
|
---|
638 | <literal>sysprep</literal> for the credentials. Sysprep is then
|
---|
639 | started with the required system rights.
|
---|
640 | </para>
|
---|
641 |
|
---|
642 | <note>
|
---|
643 | <para>
|
---|
644 | Specifying the location of <command>sysprep.exe</command> is
|
---|
645 | <emphasis role="bold">not possible</emphasis>. Instead the
|
---|
646 | following paths are used, based on the Windows release:
|
---|
647 | </para>
|
---|
648 |
|
---|
649 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
650 |
|
---|
651 | <listitem>
|
---|
652 | <para>
|
---|
653 | <filename>C:\sysprep\sysprep.exe</filename> for Windows XP
|
---|
654 | and earlier
|
---|
655 | </para>
|
---|
656 | </listitem>
|
---|
657 |
|
---|
658 | <listitem>
|
---|
659 | <para>
|
---|
660 | <filename>%WINDIR%\System32\sysprep\sysprep.exe</filename>
|
---|
661 | for Windows Vista and later
|
---|
662 | </para>
|
---|
663 | </listitem>
|
---|
664 |
|
---|
665 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
666 |
|
---|
667 | <para>
|
---|
668 | The Guest Additions will automatically use the appropriate
|
---|
669 | path to execute the system preparation tool.
|
---|
670 | </para>
|
---|
671 | </note>
|
---|
672 |
|
---|
673 | </sect2>
|
---|
674 |
|
---|
675 | </sect1>
|
---|
676 |
|
---|
677 | <sect1 id="adv-config-linux-guest">
|
---|
678 |
|
---|
679 | <title>Advanced Configuration for Linux and Oracle Solaris Guests</title>
|
---|
680 |
|
---|
681 | <sect2 id="linux-guest-manual-setup">
|
---|
682 |
|
---|
683 | <title>Manual Setup of Selected Guest Services on Linux</title>
|
---|
684 |
|
---|
685 | <para>
|
---|
686 | The &product-name; Guest Additions contain several different
|
---|
687 | drivers. If you do not want to configure them all, use the
|
---|
688 | following command to install the Guest Additions:
|
---|
689 | </para>
|
---|
690 |
|
---|
691 | <screen>$ sh ./VBoxLinuxAdditions.run no_setup</screen>
|
---|
692 |
|
---|
693 | <para>
|
---|
694 | After running this script, run the <command>rcvboxadd
|
---|
695 | setup</command> command as <literal>root</literal> to compile
|
---|
696 | the kernel modules.
|
---|
697 | </para>
|
---|
698 |
|
---|
699 | <para>
|
---|
700 | On some 64-bit guests, you must replace <filename>lib</filename>
|
---|
701 | with <filename>lib64</filename>. On older guests that do not run
|
---|
702 | the <command>udev</command> service, you must add the
|
---|
703 | <command>vboxadd</command> service to the default runlevel to
|
---|
704 | ensure that the modules are loaded.
|
---|
705 | </para>
|
---|
706 |
|
---|
707 | <para>
|
---|
708 | To set up the time synchronization service, add the
|
---|
709 | <command>vboxadd-service</command> service to the default
|
---|
710 | runlevel. To set up the X11 and OpenGL part of the Guest
|
---|
711 | Additions, run the <command>rcvboxadd-x11 setup</command>
|
---|
712 | command. Note that you do not need to enable additional
|
---|
713 | services.
|
---|
714 | </para>
|
---|
715 |
|
---|
716 | <para>
|
---|
717 | Use the <command>rcvboxadd setup</command> to recompile the
|
---|
718 | guest kernel modules.
|
---|
719 | </para>
|
---|
720 |
|
---|
721 | <para>
|
---|
722 | After compilation, reboot your guest to ensure that the new
|
---|
723 | modules are loaded.
|
---|
724 | </para>
|
---|
725 |
|
---|
726 | </sect2>
|
---|
727 |
|
---|
728 | <sect2 id="guestxorgsetup">
|
---|
729 |
|
---|
730 | <title>Guest Graphics and Mouse Driver Setup in Depth</title>
|
---|
731 |
|
---|
732 | <para>
|
---|
733 | This section assumes that you are familiar with configuring the
|
---|
734 | X.Org server using xorg.conf and optionally the newer mechanisms
|
---|
735 | using hal or udev and xorg.conf.d. If not you can learn about
|
---|
736 | them by studying the documentation which comes with X.Org.
|
---|
737 | </para>
|
---|
738 |
|
---|
739 | <para>
|
---|
740 | The &product-name; Guest Additions includes drivers for X.Org.
|
---|
741 | By default these drivers are in the following directory:
|
---|
742 | </para>
|
---|
743 |
|
---|
744 | <para>
|
---|
745 | <filename>/opt/VBoxGuestAdditions-<replaceable>version</replaceable>/other/</filename>
|
---|
746 | </para>
|
---|
747 |
|
---|
748 | <para>
|
---|
749 | The correct versions for the X server are symbolically linked
|
---|
750 | into the X.Org driver directories.
|
---|
751 | </para>
|
---|
752 |
|
---|
753 | <para>
|
---|
754 | For graphics integration to work correctly, the X server must
|
---|
755 | load the <literal>vboxvideo</literal> driver. Many recent X
|
---|
756 | server versions look for it automatically if they see that they
|
---|
757 | are running in &product-name;. For an optimal user experience,
|
---|
758 | the guest kernel drivers must be loaded and the Guest Additions
|
---|
759 | tool <command>VBoxClient</command> must be running as a client
|
---|
760 | in the X session.
|
---|
761 | </para>
|
---|
762 |
|
---|
763 | <para>
|
---|
764 | For mouse integration to work correctly, the guest kernel
|
---|
765 | drivers must be loaded. In addition, for legacy X servers the
|
---|
766 | correct <literal>vboxmouse</literal> driver must be loaded and
|
---|
767 | associated with <filename>/dev/mouse</filename> or
|
---|
768 | <filename>/dev/psaux</filename>. For most guests, a driver for a
|
---|
769 | PS/2 mouse must be loaded and the correct vboxmouse driver must
|
---|
770 | be associated with <filename>/dev/vboxguest</filename>.
|
---|
771 | </para>
|
---|
772 |
|
---|
773 | <para>
|
---|
774 | The &product-name; guest graphics driver can use any graphics
|
---|
775 | configuration for which the virtual resolution fits into the
|
---|
776 | virtual video memory allocated to the virtual machine, minus a
|
---|
777 | small amount used by the guest driver, as described in
|
---|
778 | <xref linkend="settings-display" />. The driver will offer a
|
---|
779 | range of standard modes at least up to the default guest
|
---|
780 | resolution for all active guest monitors. The default mode can
|
---|
781 | be changed by setting the output property VBOX_MODE to
|
---|
782 | "<width>x<height>" for any guest monitor. When
|
---|
783 | VBoxClient and the kernel drivers are active this is done
|
---|
784 | automatically when the host requests a mode change. The driver
|
---|
785 | for older versions can only receive new modes by querying the
|
---|
786 | host for requests at regular intervals.
|
---|
787 | </para>
|
---|
788 |
|
---|
789 | <para>
|
---|
790 | With legacy X Servers before version 1.3, you can also add your
|
---|
791 | own modes to the X server configuration file. Add them to the
|
---|
792 | "Modes" list in the "Display" subsection of the "Screen"
|
---|
793 | section. For example, the following section has a custom
|
---|
794 | 2048x800 resolution mode added:
|
---|
795 | </para>
|
---|
796 |
|
---|
797 | <screen>Section "Screen"
|
---|
798 | Identifier "Default Screen"
|
---|
799 | Device "VirtualBox graphics card"
|
---|
800 | Monitor "Generic Monitor"
|
---|
801 | DefaultDepth 24
|
---|
802 | SubSection "Display"
|
---|
803 | Depth 24
|
---|
804 | Modes "2048x800" "800x600" "640x480"
|
---|
805 | EndSubSection
|
---|
806 | EndSection</screen>
|
---|
807 |
|
---|
808 | </sect2>
|
---|
809 |
|
---|
810 | </sect1>
|
---|
811 |
|
---|
812 | <sect1 id="cpuhotplug">
|
---|
813 |
|
---|
814 | <title>CPU Hot-Plugging</title>
|
---|
815 |
|
---|
816 | <para>
|
---|
817 | With virtual machines running modern server operating systems,
|
---|
818 | &product-name; supports CPU hot-plugging.
|
---|
819 | </para>
|
---|
820 |
|
---|
821 | <para>
|
---|
822 | On a physical computer CPU hot-plugging would mean that a CPU can
|
---|
823 | be added or removed while the machine is running. &product-name;
|
---|
824 | supports adding and removing of virtual CPUs while a virtual
|
---|
825 | machine is running.
|
---|
826 | </para>
|
---|
827 |
|
---|
828 | <para>
|
---|
829 | CPU hot-plugging works only with guest operating systems that
|
---|
830 | support the feature. So far this applies only to Linux and Windows
|
---|
831 | Server. Windows supports only hot-add, while Linux supports
|
---|
832 | hot-add and hot-remove. To use this feature with more than 8 CPUs,
|
---|
833 | a 64-bit Linux guest is required.
|
---|
834 | </para>
|
---|
835 |
|
---|
836 | <para>
|
---|
837 | CPU hot-plugging is done using the <command>VBoxManage</command>
|
---|
838 | command-line interface. First, hot-plugging needs to be enabled
|
---|
839 | for a virtual machine:
|
---|
840 | </para>
|
---|
841 |
|
---|
842 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --cpu-hotplug on</screen>
|
---|
843 |
|
---|
844 | <para>
|
---|
845 | The <option>--cpus</option> option is used to specify the maximum
|
---|
846 | number of CPUs that the virtual machine can have:
|
---|
847 | </para>
|
---|
848 |
|
---|
849 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --cpus 8</screen>
|
---|
850 |
|
---|
851 | <para>
|
---|
852 | When the VM is off, you can then add and remove virtual CPUs with
|
---|
853 | the <command>VBoxManage modifyvm --plug-cpu</command> and
|
---|
854 | <command>VBoxManage modifyvm --unplug-cpu</command> commands, which
|
---|
855 | take the number of the virtual CPU as a parameter, as follows:
|
---|
856 | </para>
|
---|
857 |
|
---|
858 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --plug-cpu 3
|
---|
859 | $ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --unplug-cpu 3</screen>
|
---|
860 |
|
---|
861 | <para>
|
---|
862 | Note that CPU 0 can never be removed.
|
---|
863 | </para>
|
---|
864 |
|
---|
865 | <para>
|
---|
866 | While the VM is running, CPUs can be added and removed with the
|
---|
867 | <command>VBoxManage controlvm plugcpu</command> and
|
---|
868 | <command>VBoxManage controlvm unplugcpu</command> commands
|
---|
869 | instead, as follows:
|
---|
870 | </para>
|
---|
871 |
|
---|
872 | <screen>$ VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> plugcpu 3
|
---|
873 | $ VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> unplugcpu 3</screen>
|
---|
874 |
|
---|
875 | <para>
|
---|
876 | See <xref linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm" /> and
|
---|
877 | <xref linkend="vboxmanage-controlvm" /> for details.
|
---|
878 | </para>
|
---|
879 |
|
---|
880 | <para>
|
---|
881 | With Linux guests, the following applies:
|
---|
882 | </para>
|
---|
883 |
|
---|
884 | <para>
|
---|
885 | To prevent ejection while the CPU is still used it has to be
|
---|
886 | ejected from within the guest before. The Linux Guest Additions
|
---|
887 | contain a service which receives hot-remove events and ejects the
|
---|
888 | CPU. Also, after a CPU is added to the VM it is not automatically
|
---|
889 | used by Linux. The Linux Guest Additions service will take care of
|
---|
890 | that if installed. If not a CPU can be started with the following
|
---|
891 | command:
|
---|
892 | </para>
|
---|
893 |
|
---|
894 | <screen>$ echo 1 > /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu<id>/online</screen>
|
---|
895 |
|
---|
896 | </sect1>
|
---|
897 |
|
---|
898 | <!--<sect1 id="pcipassthrough">
|
---|
899 |
|
---|
900 | <title>PCI Passthrough</title>
|
---|
901 |
|
---|
902 | <para>
|
---|
903 | When running on Linux hosts with a kernel version later than
|
---|
904 | <literal>2.6.31</literal>, experimental host PCI devices
|
---|
905 | passthrough is available.
|
---|
906 | </para>
|
---|
907 |
|
---|
908 | <note>
|
---|
909 | <para>
|
---|
910 | The PCI passthrough module is shipped as an &product-name;
|
---|
911 | extension package, which must be installed separately. See
|
---|
912 | <xref linkend="intro-installing" />.
|
---|
913 | </para>
|
---|
914 | </note>
|
---|
915 |
|
---|
916 | <para>
|
---|
917 | This feature enables a guest to directly use physical PCI devices
|
---|
918 | on the host, even if host does not have drivers for this
|
---|
919 | particular device. Both, regular PCI and some PCI Express cards,
|
---|
920 | are supported. AGP and certain PCI Express cards are not supported
|
---|
921 | at the moment if they rely on Graphics Address Remapping Table
|
---|
922 | (GART) unit programming for texture management as it does rather
|
---|
923 | non-trivial operations with pages remapping interfering with
|
---|
924 | IOMMU. This limitation may be lifted in future releases.
|
---|
925 | </para>
|
---|
926 |
|
---|
927 | <para>
|
---|
928 | To be fully functional, PCI passthrough support in &product-name;
|
---|
929 | depends upon an IOMMU hardware unit. If the device uses bus
|
---|
930 | mastering, for example it performs DMA to the OS memory on its
|
---|
931 | own, then an IOMMU is required. Otherwise such DMA transactions
|
---|
932 | may write to the wrong physical memory address as the device DMA
|
---|
933 | engine is programmed using a device-specific protocol to perform
|
---|
934 | memory transactions. The IOMMU functions as translation unit
|
---|
935 | mapping physical memory access requests from the device using
|
---|
936 | knowledge of the guest physical address to host physical addresses
|
---|
937 | translation rules.
|
---|
938 | </para>
|
---|
939 |
|
---|
940 | <para>
|
---|
941 | Intel's solution for IOMMU is called Intel Virtualization
|
---|
942 | Technology for Directed I/O (VT-d), and AMD's solution is called
|
---|
943 | AMD-Vi. Check your motherboard datasheet for the appropriate
|
---|
944 | technology. Even if your hardware does not have a IOMMU, certain
|
---|
945 | PCI cards may work, such as serial PCI adapters, but the guest
|
---|
946 | will show a warning on boot and the VM execution will terminate if
|
---|
947 | the guest driver will attempt to enable card bus mastering.
|
---|
948 | </para>
|
---|
949 |
|
---|
950 | <para>
|
---|
951 | It is very common that the BIOS or the host OS disables the IOMMU
|
---|
952 | by default. So before any attempt to use it please make sure that
|
---|
953 | the following apply:
|
---|
954 | </para>
|
---|
955 |
|
---|
956 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
957 |
|
---|
958 | <listitem>
|
---|
959 | <para>
|
---|
960 | Your motherboard has an IOMMU unit.
|
---|
961 | </para>
|
---|
962 | </listitem>
|
---|
963 |
|
---|
964 | <listitem>
|
---|
965 | <para>
|
---|
966 | Your CPU supports the IOMMU.
|
---|
967 | </para>
|
---|
968 | </listitem>
|
---|
969 |
|
---|
970 | <listitem>
|
---|
971 | <para>
|
---|
972 | The IOMMU is enabled in the BIOS.
|
---|
973 | </para>
|
---|
974 | </listitem>
|
---|
975 |
|
---|
976 | <listitem>
|
---|
977 | <para>
|
---|
978 | The VM must run with VT-x/AMD-V and nested paging enabled.
|
---|
979 | </para>
|
---|
980 | </listitem>
|
---|
981 |
|
---|
982 | <listitem>
|
---|
983 | <para>
|
---|
984 | Your Linux kernel was compiled with IOMMU support, including
|
---|
985 | DMA remapping. See the <literal>CONFIG_DMAR</literal> kernel
|
---|
986 | compilation option. The PCI stub driver
|
---|
987 | (<literal>CONFIG_PCI_STUB</literal>) is required as well.
|
---|
988 | </para>
|
---|
989 | </listitem>
|
---|
990 |
|
---|
991 | <listitem>
|
---|
992 | <para>
|
---|
993 | Your Linux kernel recognizes and uses the IOMMU unit. The
|
---|
994 | <literal>intel_iommu=on</literal> boot option could be needed.
|
---|
995 | Search for DMAR and PCI-DMA in kernel boot log.
|
---|
996 | </para>
|
---|
997 | </listitem>
|
---|
998 |
|
---|
999 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
1000 |
|
---|
1001 | <para>
|
---|
1002 | Once you made sure that the host kernel supports the IOMMU, the
|
---|
1003 | next step is to select the PCI card and attach it to the guest. To
|
---|
1004 | figure out the list of available PCI devices, use the
|
---|
1005 | <command>lspci</command> command. The output will look as follows:
|
---|
1006 | </para>
|
---|
1007 |
|
---|
1008 | <screen>01:00.0 VGA compatible controller: ATI Technologies Inc Cedar PRO [Radeon HD 5450]
|
---|
1009 | 01:00.1 Audio device: ATI Technologies Inc Manhattan HDMI Audio [Mobility Radeon HD 5000 Series]
|
---|
1010 | 02:00.0 Ethernet controller: Realtek Semiconductor Co., Ltd. RTL8111/8168B PCI Express Gigabit
|
---|
1011 | Ethernet controller (rev 03)
|
---|
1012 | 03:00.0 SATA controller: JMicron Technology Corp. JMB362/JMB363 Serial ATA Controller (rev 03)
|
---|
1013 | 03:00.1 IDE interface: JMicron Technology Corp. JMB362/JMB363 Serial ATA Controller (rev 03)
|
---|
1014 | 06:00.0 VGA compatible controller: nVidia Corporation G86 [GeForce 8500 GT] (rev a1)</screen>
|
---|
1015 |
|
---|
1016 | <para>
|
---|
1017 | The first column is a PCI address, in the format
|
---|
1018 | <literal><replaceable>bus</replaceable>:<replaceable>device</replaceable>.<replaceable>function</replaceable></literal>.
|
---|
1019 | This address could be used to identify the device for further
|
---|
1020 | operations. For example, to attach a PCI network controller on the
|
---|
1021 | system listed above to the second PCI bus in the guest, as device
|
---|
1022 | 5, function 0, use the following command:
|
---|
1023 | </para>
|
---|
1024 |
|
---|
1025 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> -\-pciattach 02:00.0@01:05.0</screen>
|
---|
1026 |
|
---|
1027 | <para>
|
---|
1028 | To detach the same device, use:
|
---|
1029 | </para>
|
---|
1030 |
|
---|
1031 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> -\-pcidetach 02:00.0</screen>
|
---|
1032 |
|
---|
1033 | <para>
|
---|
1034 | Please note that both host and guest could freely assign a
|
---|
1035 | different PCI address to the card attached during runtime, so
|
---|
1036 | those addresses only apply to the address of the card at the
|
---|
1037 | moment of attachment on the host, and during BIOS PCI init on the
|
---|
1038 | guest.
|
---|
1039 | </para>
|
---|
1040 |
|
---|
1041 | <para>
|
---|
1042 | If the virtual machine has a PCI device attached, certain
|
---|
1043 | limitations apply:
|
---|
1044 | </para>
|
---|
1045 |
|
---|
1046 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
1047 |
|
---|
1048 | <listitem>
|
---|
1049 | <para>
|
---|
1050 | Only PCI cards with non-shared interrupts, such as those using
|
---|
1051 | MSI on the host, are supported at the moment.
|
---|
1052 | </para>
|
---|
1053 | </listitem>
|
---|
1054 |
|
---|
1055 | <listitem>
|
---|
1056 | <para>
|
---|
1057 | No guest state can be reliably saved or restored. The internal
|
---|
1058 | state of the PCI card cannot be retrieved.
|
---|
1059 | </para>
|
---|
1060 | </listitem>
|
---|
1061 |
|
---|
1062 | <listitem>
|
---|
1063 | <para>
|
---|
1064 | Teleportation, also called live migration, does not work. The
|
---|
1065 | internal state of the PCI card cannot be retrieved.
|
---|
1066 | </para>
|
---|
1067 | </listitem>
|
---|
1068 |
|
---|
1069 | <listitem>
|
---|
1070 | <para>
|
---|
1071 | No lazy physical memory allocation. The host will preallocate
|
---|
1072 | the whole RAM required for the VM on startup, as we cannot
|
---|
1073 | catch physical hardware accesses to the physical memory.
|
---|
1074 | </para>
|
---|
1075 | </listitem>
|
---|
1076 |
|
---|
1077 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
1078 |
|
---|
1079 | </sect1>-->
|
---|
1080 |
|
---|
1081 | <sect1 id="webcam-passthrough">
|
---|
1082 |
|
---|
1083 | <title>Webcam Passthrough</title>
|
---|
1084 |
|
---|
1085 | <sect2 id="webcam-using-guest">
|
---|
1086 |
|
---|
1087 | <title>Using a Host Webcam in the Guest</title>
|
---|
1088 |
|
---|
1089 | <para>
|
---|
1090 | &product-name; includes a feature called <emphasis>webcam
|
---|
1091 | passthrough</emphasis>, which enables a guest to use a host
|
---|
1092 | webcam. This complements the general USB passthrough support
|
---|
1093 | which was the typical way of using host webcams in legacy
|
---|
1094 | releases. The webcam passthrough support can handle non-USB
|
---|
1095 | video sources in theory, but this is completely untested.
|
---|
1096 | </para>
|
---|
1097 |
|
---|
1098 | <note>
|
---|
1099 | <para>
|
---|
1100 | The webcam passthrough module is shipped as part of the
|
---|
1101 | &product-name; extension pack, which must be installed
|
---|
1102 | separately. See <xref linkend="intro-installing" />.
|
---|
1103 | </para>
|
---|
1104 | </note>
|
---|
1105 |
|
---|
1106 | <para>
|
---|
1107 | The host webcam can be attached to the VM using the
|
---|
1108 | <emphasis role="bold">Devices</emphasis> menu in the VM menu
|
---|
1109 | bar. The <emphasis role="bold">Webcams</emphasis> menu contains
|
---|
1110 | a list of available video input devices on the host. Clicking on
|
---|
1111 | a webcam name attaches or detaches the corresponding host
|
---|
1112 | device.
|
---|
1113 | </para>
|
---|
1114 |
|
---|
1115 | <para>
|
---|
1116 | The <command>VBoxManage</command> command line tool can be used
|
---|
1117 | to enable webcam passthrough. Please see the host-specific
|
---|
1118 | sections below for additional details. The following commands
|
---|
1119 | are available:
|
---|
1120 | </para>
|
---|
1121 |
|
---|
1122 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
1123 |
|
---|
1124 | <listitem>
|
---|
1125 | <para>
|
---|
1126 | Get a list of host webcams, or other video input devices:
|
---|
1127 | </para>
|
---|
1128 |
|
---|
1129 | <screen>$ VBoxManage list webcams</screen>
|
---|
1130 |
|
---|
1131 | <para>
|
---|
1132 | The output format is as follows:
|
---|
1133 | </para>
|
---|
1134 |
|
---|
1135 | <screen>alias "user friendly name"
|
---|
1136 | host path or identifier</screen>
|
---|
1137 |
|
---|
1138 | <para>
|
---|
1139 | The alias can be used as a shortcut in other commands. Alias
|
---|
1140 | '.0' means the default video input device on the host. Alias
|
---|
1141 | '.1', '.2'means first, second video input device, and so on.
|
---|
1142 | The device order is host-specific.
|
---|
1143 | </para>
|
---|
1144 | </listitem>
|
---|
1145 |
|
---|
1146 | <listitem>
|
---|
1147 | <para>
|
---|
1148 | Attach a webcam to a running VM, as follows:
|
---|
1149 | </para>
|
---|
1150 |
|
---|
1151 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM name</replaceable> webcam attach [<replaceable>host_path</replaceable>|<replaceable>alias</replaceable> [<replaceable>settings</replaceable>]]</screen>
|
---|
1152 |
|
---|
1153 | <para>
|
---|
1154 | This attaches a USB webcam device to the guest.
|
---|
1155 | </para>
|
---|
1156 |
|
---|
1157 | <para>
|
---|
1158 | The <literal>settings</literal> parameter is a string
|
---|
1159 | <literal>Setting1=Value1;Setting2=Value2</literal>, which
|
---|
1160 | enables you to configure the emulated webcam device. The
|
---|
1161 | following settings are supported:
|
---|
1162 | </para>
|
---|
1163 |
|
---|
1164 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
1165 |
|
---|
1166 | <listitem>
|
---|
1167 | <para>
|
---|
1168 | <literal>MaxFramerate</literal>: The highest rate at
|
---|
1169 | which video frames are sent to the guest. A higher frame
|
---|
1170 | rate requires more CPU power. Therefore sometimes it is
|
---|
1171 | useful to set a lower limit. Default is no limit and
|
---|
1172 | allow the guest to use all frame rates supported by the
|
---|
1173 | host webcam.
|
---|
1174 | </para>
|
---|
1175 | </listitem>
|
---|
1176 |
|
---|
1177 | <listitem>
|
---|
1178 | <para>
|
---|
1179 | <literal>MaxPayloadTransferSize</literal>: How many
|
---|
1180 | bytes the emulated webcam can send to the guest at a
|
---|
1181 | time. Default value is 3060 bytes, which is used by some
|
---|
1182 | webcams. Higher values can slightly reduce CPU load, if
|
---|
1183 | the guest is able to use larger buffers. However, a high
|
---|
1184 | <literal>MaxPayloadTransferSize</literal> might be not
|
---|
1185 | supported by some guests.
|
---|
1186 | </para>
|
---|
1187 | </listitem>
|
---|
1188 |
|
---|
1189 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
1190 | </listitem>
|
---|
1191 |
|
---|
1192 | <listitem>
|
---|
1193 | <para>
|
---|
1194 | Detach a webcam from a running VM, as follows:
|
---|
1195 | </para>
|
---|
1196 |
|
---|
1197 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> webcam detach [<replaceable>host_path</replaceable>|<replaceable>alias</replaceable>]</screen>
|
---|
1198 | </listitem>
|
---|
1199 |
|
---|
1200 | <listitem>
|
---|
1201 | <para>
|
---|
1202 | List the webcams attached to a running VM, as follows:
|
---|
1203 | </para>
|
---|
1204 |
|
---|
1205 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> webcam list</screen>
|
---|
1206 |
|
---|
1207 | <para>
|
---|
1208 | The output contains the path or alias which was used in the
|
---|
1209 | <command>webcam attach</command> command for each attached
|
---|
1210 | webcam.
|
---|
1211 | </para>
|
---|
1212 | </listitem>
|
---|
1213 |
|
---|
1214 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
1215 |
|
---|
1216 | </sect2>
|
---|
1217 |
|
---|
1218 | <sect2 id="webcam-win-hosts">
|
---|
1219 |
|
---|
1220 | <title>Windows Hosts</title>
|
---|
1221 |
|
---|
1222 | <para>
|
---|
1223 | When the webcam device is detached from the host, the emulated
|
---|
1224 | webcam device is automatically detached from the guest.
|
---|
1225 | </para>
|
---|
1226 |
|
---|
1227 | </sect2>
|
---|
1228 |
|
---|
1229 | <sect2 id="webcam-mac-hosts">
|
---|
1230 |
|
---|
1231 | <title>Mac OS X Hosts</title>
|
---|
1232 |
|
---|
1233 | <para>
|
---|
1234 | Mac OS X version 10.9 or later is required.
|
---|
1235 | </para>
|
---|
1236 |
|
---|
1237 | <para>
|
---|
1238 | When the webcam device is detached from the host, the emulated
|
---|
1239 | webcam device remains attached to the guest and must be manually
|
---|
1240 | detached using the <command>VBoxManage controlvm
|
---|
1241 | <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> webcam detach</command>
|
---|
1242 | command.
|
---|
1243 | </para>
|
---|
1244 |
|
---|
1245 | </sect2>
|
---|
1246 |
|
---|
1247 | <sect2 id="webcam-linux-hosts">
|
---|
1248 |
|
---|
1249 | <title>Linux and Oracle Solaris Hosts</title>
|
---|
1250 |
|
---|
1251 | <para>
|
---|
1252 | When the webcam is detached from the host the emulated webcam
|
---|
1253 | device is automatically detached from the guest only if the
|
---|
1254 | webcam is streaming video. If the emulated webcam is inactive it
|
---|
1255 | should be manually detached using the <command>VBoxManage
|
---|
1256 | controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> webcam
|
---|
1257 | detach</command> command.
|
---|
1258 | </para>
|
---|
1259 |
|
---|
1260 | <para>
|
---|
1261 | Aliases <filename>.0</filename> and <filename>.1</filename> are
|
---|
1262 | mapped to <filename>/dev/video0</filename>, alias
|
---|
1263 | <filename>.2</filename> is mapped to
|
---|
1264 | <filename>/dev/video1</filename> and so forth.
|
---|
1265 | </para>
|
---|
1266 |
|
---|
1267 | </sect2>
|
---|
1268 |
|
---|
1269 | </sect1>
|
---|
1270 |
|
---|
1271 | <sect1 id="adv-display-config">
|
---|
1272 |
|
---|
1273 | <title>Advanced Display Configuration</title>
|
---|
1274 |
|
---|
1275 | <sect2 id="customvesa">
|
---|
1276 |
|
---|
1277 | <title>Custom VESA Resolutions</title>
|
---|
1278 |
|
---|
1279 | <para>
|
---|
1280 | Apart from the standard VESA resolutions, the &product-name;
|
---|
1281 | VESA BIOS enables you to add up to 16 custom video modes which
|
---|
1282 | will be reported to the guest operating system. When using
|
---|
1283 | Windows guests with the &product-name; Guest Additions, a custom
|
---|
1284 | graphics driver will be used instead of the fallback VESA
|
---|
1285 | solution so this information does not apply.
|
---|
1286 | </para>
|
---|
1287 |
|
---|
1288 | <para>
|
---|
1289 | Additional video modes can be configured for each VM using the
|
---|
1290 | extra data facility. The extra data key is called
|
---|
1291 | <literal>CustomVideoMode<replaceable>x</replaceable></literal>
|
---|
1292 | with <replaceable>x</replaceable> being a number from 1 to 16.
|
---|
1293 | Please note that modes will be read from 1 until either the
|
---|
1294 | following number is not defined or 16 is reached. The following
|
---|
1295 | example adds a video mode that corresponds to the native display
|
---|
1296 | resolution of many notebook computers:
|
---|
1297 | </para>
|
---|
1298 |
|
---|
1299 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "CustomVideoMode1" "1400x1050x16"</screen>
|
---|
1300 |
|
---|
1301 | <para>
|
---|
1302 | The VESA mode IDs for custom video modes start at
|
---|
1303 | <literal>0x160</literal>. In order to use the above defined
|
---|
1304 | custom video mode, the following command line has to be supplied
|
---|
1305 | to Linux:
|
---|
1306 | </para>
|
---|
1307 |
|
---|
1308 | <screen>vga = 0x200 | 0x160
|
---|
1309 | vga = 864</screen>
|
---|
1310 |
|
---|
1311 | <para>
|
---|
1312 | For guest operating systems with &product-name; Guest Additions,
|
---|
1313 | a custom video mode can be set using the video mode hint
|
---|
1314 | feature.
|
---|
1315 | </para>
|
---|
1316 |
|
---|
1317 | </sect2>
|
---|
1318 |
|
---|
1319 | <sect2 id="max-resolution-guests">
|
---|
1320 |
|
---|
1321 | <title>Configuring the Maximum Resolution of Guests When Using the Graphical
|
---|
1322 | Frontend</title>
|
---|
1323 |
|
---|
1324 | <para>
|
---|
1325 | When guest systems with the Guest Additions installed are
|
---|
1326 | started using the graphical frontend, the normal &product-name;
|
---|
1327 | application, they will not be allowed to use screen resolutions
|
---|
1328 | greater than the host's screen size unless the user manually
|
---|
1329 | resizes them by dragging the window, switching to full screen or
|
---|
1330 | seamless mode or sending a video mode hint using
|
---|
1331 | <command>VBoxManage</command>. This behavior is what most users
|
---|
1332 | will want, but if you have different needs, you can change it by
|
---|
1333 | issuing one of the following commands from the command line:
|
---|
1334 | </para>
|
---|
1335 |
|
---|
1336 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
1337 |
|
---|
1338 | <listitem>
|
---|
1339 | <para>
|
---|
1340 | Remove all limits on guest resolutions.
|
---|
1341 | </para>
|
---|
1342 |
|
---|
1343 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/MaxGuestResolution any</screen>
|
---|
1344 | </listitem>
|
---|
1345 |
|
---|
1346 | <listitem>
|
---|
1347 | <para>
|
---|
1348 | Manually specify a maximum resolution.
|
---|
1349 | </para>
|
---|
1350 |
|
---|
1351 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/MaxGuestResolution <replaceable>width</replaceable>x<replaceable>height</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
1352 | </listitem>
|
---|
1353 |
|
---|
1354 | <listitem>
|
---|
1355 | <para>
|
---|
1356 | Restore the default settings to all guest VMs.
|
---|
1357 | </para>
|
---|
1358 |
|
---|
1359 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/MaxGuestResolution auto</screen>
|
---|
1360 | </listitem>
|
---|
1361 |
|
---|
1362 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
1363 |
|
---|
1364 | </sect2>
|
---|
1365 |
|
---|
1366 | </sect1>
|
---|
1367 |
|
---|
1368 | <sect1 id="adv-storage-config">
|
---|
1369 |
|
---|
1370 | <title>Advanced Storage Configuration</title>
|
---|
1371 |
|
---|
1372 | <sect2 id="rawdisk">
|
---|
1373 |
|
---|
1374 | <title>Using a Raw Host Hard Disk From a Guest</title>
|
---|
1375 |
|
---|
1376 | <para>
|
---|
1377 | As an alternative to using virtual disk images as described in
|
---|
1378 | <xref linkend="storage" />, &product-name; can also present
|
---|
1379 | either entire physical hard disks or selected partitions as
|
---|
1380 | virtual disks to virtual machines.
|
---|
1381 | </para>
|
---|
1382 |
|
---|
1383 | <para>
|
---|
1384 | With &product-name;, this type of access is called <emphasis>raw
|
---|
1385 | hard disk access</emphasis>. It enables a guest operating system
|
---|
1386 | to access its virtual hard disk without going through the host
|
---|
1387 | OS file system. The actual performance difference for image
|
---|
1388 | files compared to raw disk varies greatly depending on the
|
---|
1389 | overhead of the host file system, whether dynamically growing
|
---|
1390 | images are used, and on host OS caching strategies. The caching
|
---|
1391 | indirectly also affects other aspects such as failure behavior.
|
---|
1392 | For example, whether the virtual disk contains all data written
|
---|
1393 | before a host OS crash. Consult your host OS documentation for
|
---|
1394 | details on this.
|
---|
1395 | </para>
|
---|
1396 |
|
---|
1397 | <warning>
|
---|
1398 | <para>
|
---|
1399 | Raw hard disk access is for expert users only. Incorrect use
|
---|
1400 | or use of an outdated configuration can lead to
|
---|
1401 | <emphasis role="bold">total loss of data</emphasis> on the
|
---|
1402 | physical disk. Most importantly, <emphasis>do not</emphasis>
|
---|
1403 | attempt to boot the partition with the currently running host
|
---|
1404 | operating system in a guest. This will lead to severe data
|
---|
1405 | corruption.
|
---|
1406 | </para>
|
---|
1407 | </warning>
|
---|
1408 |
|
---|
1409 | <para>
|
---|
1410 | Raw hard disk access, both for entire disks and individual
|
---|
1411 | partitions, is implemented as part of the VMDK image format
|
---|
1412 | support. As a result, you will need to create a special VMDK
|
---|
1413 | image file which defines where the data will be stored. After
|
---|
1414 | creating such a special VMDK image, you can use it like a
|
---|
1415 | regular virtual disk image. For example, you can use the
|
---|
1416 | VirtualBox Manager, see <xref linkend="vdis" />, or
|
---|
1417 | <command>VBoxManage</command> to assign the image to a virtual
|
---|
1418 | machine.
|
---|
1419 | </para>
|
---|
1420 |
|
---|
1421 | <sect3 id="rawdisk-access-entire-physical-disk">
|
---|
1422 |
|
---|
1423 | <title>Access to Entire Physical Hard Disk</title>
|
---|
1424 |
|
---|
1425 | <para>
|
---|
1426 | While this variant is the simplest to set up, you must be
|
---|
1427 | aware that this will give a guest operating system direct and
|
---|
1428 | full access to an <emphasis>entire physical disk</emphasis>.
|
---|
1429 | If your <emphasis>host</emphasis> operating system is also
|
---|
1430 | booted from this disk, please take special care to not access
|
---|
1431 | the partition from the guest at all. On the positive side, the
|
---|
1432 | physical disk can be repartitioned in arbitrary ways without
|
---|
1433 | having to recreate the image file that gives access to the raw
|
---|
1434 | disk.
|
---|
1435 | </para>
|
---|
1436 |
|
---|
1437 | <para>
|
---|
1438 | On a Linux host, to create an image that represents an entire
|
---|
1439 | physical hard disk which will not contain any actual data, as
|
---|
1440 | this will all be stored on the physical disk, use the
|
---|
1441 | following command:
|
---|
1442 | </para>
|
---|
1443 |
|
---|
1444 | <screen>$ VBoxManage createmedium disk --filename <replaceable>path-to-file</replaceable>.vmdk --format=VMDK
|
---|
1445 | --variant RawDisk --property RawDrive=/dev/sda</screen>
|
---|
1446 |
|
---|
1447 | <para>
|
---|
1448 | This creates the
|
---|
1449 | <filename><replaceable>path-to-file</replaceable>.vmdk</filename>
|
---|
1450 | file image that must be an absolute path. All data is read and
|
---|
1451 | written from <filename>/dev/sda</filename>.
|
---|
1452 | </para>
|
---|
1453 |
|
---|
1454 | <para>
|
---|
1455 | On a Windows host, instead of the above device specification,
|
---|
1456 | for example use <filename>\\.\PhysicalDrive0</filename>. On a
|
---|
1457 | Mac OS X host, instead of the above device specification use
|
---|
1458 | for example <filename>/dev/rdisk1</filename>. Note that on Mac
|
---|
1459 | OS X you can only get access to an entire disk if no volume is
|
---|
1460 | mounted from it.
|
---|
1461 | </para>
|
---|
1462 |
|
---|
1463 | <para>
|
---|
1464 | Creating the image requires read/write access for the given
|
---|
1465 | device. Read/write access is also later needed when using the
|
---|
1466 | image from a virtual machine. On some host platforms, such as
|
---|
1467 | Windows, raw disk access may be restricted and not permitted
|
---|
1468 | by the host OS in some situations.
|
---|
1469 | </para>
|
---|
1470 |
|
---|
1471 | <para>
|
---|
1472 | Just like with regular disk images, this does not
|
---|
1473 | automatically attach the newly created image to a virtual
|
---|
1474 | machine. This can be done as follows:
|
---|
1475 | </para>
|
---|
1476 |
|
---|
1477 | <screen>$ VBoxManage storageattach WindowsXP --storagectl "IDE Controller" \
|
---|
1478 | --port 0 --device 0 --type hdd --medium <replaceable>path-to-file</replaceable>.vmdk</screen>
|
---|
1479 |
|
---|
1480 | <para>
|
---|
1481 | When this is done the selected virtual machine will boot from
|
---|
1482 | the specified physical disk.
|
---|
1483 | </para>
|
---|
1484 |
|
---|
1485 | </sect3>
|
---|
1486 |
|
---|
1487 | <sect3 id="rawdisk-access-disk-partitions">
|
---|
1488 |
|
---|
1489 | <title>Access to Individual Physical Hard Disk Partitions</title>
|
---|
1490 |
|
---|
1491 | <para>
|
---|
1492 | This <emphasis>raw partition support</emphasis> is quite
|
---|
1493 | similar to the full hard disk access described above. However,
|
---|
1494 | in this case, any partitioning information will be stored
|
---|
1495 | inside the VMDK image. This means that you can install a
|
---|
1496 | different boot loader in the virtual hard disk without
|
---|
1497 | affecting the host's partitioning information. While the guest
|
---|
1498 | will be able to <emphasis>see</emphasis> all partitions that
|
---|
1499 | exist on the physical disk, access will be filtered in that
|
---|
1500 | reading from partitions for which no access is allowed the
|
---|
1501 | partitions will only yield zeroes, and all writes to them are
|
---|
1502 | ignored.
|
---|
1503 | </para>
|
---|
1504 |
|
---|
1505 | <para>
|
---|
1506 | To create a special image for raw partition support, which
|
---|
1507 | will contain a small amount of data, on a Linux host, use the
|
---|
1508 | command:
|
---|
1509 | </para>
|
---|
1510 |
|
---|
1511 | <screen>$ VBoxManage createmedium disk --filename <replaceable>path-to-file</replaceable>.vmdk --format=VMDK
|
---|
1512 | --variant RawDisk --property RawDrive=/dev/sda --property Partitions=1,5</screen>
|
---|
1513 |
|
---|
1514 | <para>
|
---|
1515 | The command is identical to the one for full hard disk access,
|
---|
1516 | except for the additional
|
---|
1517 | <option>--property Partitions=1,5</option>
|
---|
1518 | parameter. This example would create the image
|
---|
1519 | <filename><replaceable>path-to-file</replaceable>.vmdk</filename>,
|
---|
1520 | which must be absolute, and partitions 1 and 5 of
|
---|
1521 | <filename>/dev/sda</filename> would be made accessible to the
|
---|
1522 | guest.
|
---|
1523 | </para>
|
---|
1524 |
|
---|
1525 | <para>
|
---|
1526 | &product-name; uses the same partition numbering as your Linux
|
---|
1527 | host. As a result, the numbers given in the above example
|
---|
1528 | would refer to the first primary partition and the first
|
---|
1529 | logical drive in the extended partition, respectively.
|
---|
1530 | </para>
|
---|
1531 |
|
---|
1532 | <para>
|
---|
1533 | On a Windows host, instead of the above device specification,
|
---|
1534 | use for example <filename>\\.\PhysicalDrive0</filename>. On a
|
---|
1535 | Mac OS X host, instead of the above device specification use
|
---|
1536 | <filename>/dev/rdisk1</filename>, for example. Note that on OS
|
---|
1537 | X you can only use partitions which are not mounted. Unmount
|
---|
1538 | the respective disk first using
|
---|
1539 | <emphasis>diskutil unmountDisk <filename>/dev/diskX</filename></emphasis>.
|
---|
1540 | Partition numbers are the same on Linux, Windows, and Mac OS X hosts.
|
---|
1541 | </para>
|
---|
1542 |
|
---|
1543 | <para>
|
---|
1544 | The numbers for the list of partitions can be taken from the
|
---|
1545 | output of the following command:
|
---|
1546 | </para>
|
---|
1547 |
|
---|
1548 | <screen>$ VBoxManage list hostdrives</screen>
|
---|
1549 |
|
---|
1550 | <para>
|
---|
1551 | The output lists available drives and their partitions with
|
---|
1552 | the partition types and sizes to give the user enough information
|
---|
1553 | to identify the partitions necessary for the guest.
|
---|
1554 | </para>
|
---|
1555 |
|
---|
1556 | <para>
|
---|
1557 | Images which give access to individual partitions are specific
|
---|
1558 | to a particular host disk setup. You cannot transfer these
|
---|
1559 | images to another host. Also, whenever the host partitioning
|
---|
1560 | changes, the image <emphasis>must be recreated</emphasis>.
|
---|
1561 | </para>
|
---|
1562 |
|
---|
1563 | <para>
|
---|
1564 | Creating the image requires read/write access for the given
|
---|
1565 | device. Read/write access is also later needed when using the
|
---|
1566 | image from a virtual machine. If this is not feasible, there
|
---|
1567 | is a special variant for raw partition access, currently only
|
---|
1568 | available on Linux hosts, that avoids having to give the
|
---|
1569 | current user access to the entire disk. To set up such an
|
---|
1570 | image, use:
|
---|
1571 | </para>
|
---|
1572 |
|
---|
1573 | <screen>$ VBoxManage createmedium disk --filename <replaceable>path-to-file</replaceable>.vmdk --format=VMDK
|
---|
1574 | --variant RawDisk --property RawDrive=/dev/sda --property Partitions=1,5
|
---|
1575 | --property Relative=1</screen>
|
---|
1576 |
|
---|
1577 | <para>
|
---|
1578 | When used from a virtual machine, the image will then refer
|
---|
1579 | not to the entire disk, but only to the individual partitions.
|
---|
1580 | In this example, <filename>/dev/sda1</filename> and
|
---|
1581 | <filename>/dev/sda5</filename>. As a consequence, read/write
|
---|
1582 | access is only required for the affected partitions, not for
|
---|
1583 | the entire disk. During creation however, read-only access to
|
---|
1584 | the entire disk is required to obtain the partitioning
|
---|
1585 | information.
|
---|
1586 | </para>
|
---|
1587 |
|
---|
1588 | <para>
|
---|
1589 | In some configurations it may be necessary to change the MBR
|
---|
1590 | code of the created image. For example, to replace the Linux
|
---|
1591 | boot loader that is used on the host by another boot loader.
|
---|
1592 | This enables for example the guest to boot directly to
|
---|
1593 | Windows, while the host boots Linux from the "same" disk. For
|
---|
1594 | this purpose the <option>--property-file
|
---|
1595 | BootSector=<replaceable>path-to-file-with-boot-sector</replaceable></option>
|
---|
1596 | parameter is provided. It specifies a file name from which to
|
---|
1597 | take the MBR code. The partition table is not modified at all,
|
---|
1598 | so a MBR file from a system with totally different
|
---|
1599 | partitioning can be used. An example of this is:
|
---|
1600 | </para>
|
---|
1601 |
|
---|
1602 | <screen>$ VBoxManage createmedium disk --filename <replaceable>path-to-file</replaceable>.vmdk --format=VMDK
|
---|
1603 | --variant RawDisk --property RawDrive=/dev/sda --property Partitions=1,5
|
---|
1604 | --property-file BootSector=winxp.mbr</screen>
|
---|
1605 |
|
---|
1606 | <para>
|
---|
1607 | The modified MBR will be stored inside the image, not on the
|
---|
1608 | host disk.
|
---|
1609 | </para>
|
---|
1610 |
|
---|
1611 | <para>
|
---|
1612 | The created image can be attached to a storage controller in a
|
---|
1613 | VM configuration as usual.
|
---|
1614 | </para>
|
---|
1615 |
|
---|
1616 | </sect3>
|
---|
1617 |
|
---|
1618 | </sect2>
|
---|
1619 |
|
---|
1620 | <sect2 id="changevpd">
|
---|
1621 |
|
---|
1622 | <title>Configuring the Hard Disk Vendor Product Data (VPD)</title>
|
---|
1623 |
|
---|
1624 | <para>
|
---|
1625 | &product-name; reports vendor product data for its virtual hard
|
---|
1626 | disks which consist of hard disk serial number, firmware
|
---|
1627 | revision and model number. These can be changed using the
|
---|
1628 | following commands:
|
---|
1629 | </para>
|
---|
1630 |
|
---|
1631 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1632 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/SerialNumber" "serial"
|
---|
1633 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1634 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/FirmwareRevision" "firmware"
|
---|
1635 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1636 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/ModelNumber" "model"</screen>
|
---|
1637 |
|
---|
1638 | <para>
|
---|
1639 | The serial number is a 20 byte alphanumeric string, the firmware
|
---|
1640 | revision an 8 byte alphanumeric string and the model number a 40
|
---|
1641 | byte alphanumeric string. Instead of Port0, referring to the
|
---|
1642 | first port, specify the desired SATA hard disk port.
|
---|
1643 | </para>
|
---|
1644 |
|
---|
1645 | <para>
|
---|
1646 | The above commands apply to virtual machines with an AHCI (SATA)
|
---|
1647 | controller. The commands for virtual machines with an IDE
|
---|
1648 | controller are:
|
---|
1649 | </para>
|
---|
1650 |
|
---|
1651 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1652 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/piix3ide/0/Config/PrimaryMaster/SerialNumber" "serial"
|
---|
1653 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1654 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/piix3ide/0/Config/PrimaryMaster/FirmwareRevision" "firmware"
|
---|
1655 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1656 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/piix3ide/0/Config/PrimaryMaster/ModelNumber" "model"</screen>
|
---|
1657 |
|
---|
1658 | <para>
|
---|
1659 | For hard disks, you can mark the drive as having a
|
---|
1660 | non-rotational medium by using the following command:
|
---|
1661 | </para>
|
---|
1662 |
|
---|
1663 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1664 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/NonRotational" "1"</screen>
|
---|
1665 |
|
---|
1666 | <para>
|
---|
1667 | Additional three parameters are needed for CD/DVD drives to
|
---|
1668 | report the vendor product data:
|
---|
1669 | </para>
|
---|
1670 |
|
---|
1671 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1672 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/ATAPIVendorId" "vendor"
|
---|
1673 | VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1674 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/ATAPIProductId" "product"
|
---|
1675 | VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1676 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/ATAPIRevision" "revision"</screen>
|
---|
1677 |
|
---|
1678 | <para>
|
---|
1679 | The vendor id is an 8 byte alphanumeric string, the product id
|
---|
1680 | an 16 byte alphanumeric string and the revision a 4 byte
|
---|
1681 | alphanumeric string. Instead of Port0, referring to the first
|
---|
1682 | port, specify the desired SATA hard disk port.
|
---|
1683 | </para>
|
---|
1684 |
|
---|
1685 | </sect2>
|
---|
1686 |
|
---|
1687 | <sect2 id="iscsi-intnet">
|
---|
1688 |
|
---|
1689 | <title>Access iSCSI Targets Using Internal Networking</title>
|
---|
1690 |
|
---|
1691 | <para>
|
---|
1692 | As an experimental feature, &product-name; enables access to an
|
---|
1693 | iSCSI target running in a virtual machine which is configured to
|
---|
1694 | use Internal Networking mode. See
|
---|
1695 | <xref linkend="storage-iscsi" />,
|
---|
1696 | <xref linkend="network_internal" />, and
|
---|
1697 | <xref
|
---|
1698 | linkend="vboxmanage-storageattach" />.
|
---|
1699 | </para>
|
---|
1700 |
|
---|
1701 | <para>
|
---|
1702 | The IP stack accessing Internal Networking must be configured in
|
---|
1703 | the virtual machine which accesses the iSCSI target. A free
|
---|
1704 | static IP and a MAC address not used by other virtual machines
|
---|
1705 | must be chosen. In the example below, adapt the name of the
|
---|
1706 | virtual machine, the MAC address, the IP configuration, and the
|
---|
1707 | Internal Networking name (MyIntNet) according to your needs. The
|
---|
1708 | following eight commands must first be issued:
|
---|
1709 | </para>
|
---|
1710 |
|
---|
1711 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1712 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/Trusted 1
|
---|
1713 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1714 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/Config/MAC 08:00:27:01:02:0f
|
---|
1715 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1716 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/Config/IP 10.0.9.1
|
---|
1717 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1718 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/Config/Netmask 255.255.255.0
|
---|
1719 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1720 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/LUN#0/Driver IntNet
|
---|
1721 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1722 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/LUN#0/Config/Network MyIntNet
|
---|
1723 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1724 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/LUN#0/Config/TrunkType 2
|
---|
1725 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1726 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/LUN#0/Config/IsService 1</screen>
|
---|
1727 |
|
---|
1728 | <para>
|
---|
1729 | Finally the iSCSI disk must be attached with the
|
---|
1730 | <option>--intnet</option> option to tell the iSCSI initiator to
|
---|
1731 | use internal networking, as follows:
|
---|
1732 | </para>
|
---|
1733 |
|
---|
1734 | <screen>$ VBoxManage storageattach ... --medium iscsi --server 10.0.9.30 \
|
---|
1735 | --target iqn.2008-12.com.sun:sampletarget --intnet</screen>
|
---|
1736 |
|
---|
1737 | <para>
|
---|
1738 | Compared to a regular iSCSI setup, the IP address of the target
|
---|
1739 | <emphasis>must</emphasis> be specified as a numeric IP address,
|
---|
1740 | as there is no DNS resolver for internal networking.
|
---|
1741 | </para>
|
---|
1742 |
|
---|
1743 | <para>
|
---|
1744 | The virtual machine with the iSCSI target should be started
|
---|
1745 | before the VM using it is powered on. If a virtual machine using
|
---|
1746 | an iSCSI disk is started without having the iSCSI target powered
|
---|
1747 | up, it can take up to 200 seconds to detect this situation. The
|
---|
1748 | VM will fail to power up.
|
---|
1749 | </para>
|
---|
1750 |
|
---|
1751 | </sect2>
|
---|
1752 |
|
---|
1753 | </sect1>
|
---|
1754 |
|
---|
1755 | <sect1 id="changenat">
|
---|
1756 |
|
---|
1757 | <title>Fine Tuning the &product-name; NAT Engine</title>
|
---|
1758 |
|
---|
1759 | <sect2 id="nat-address-config">
|
---|
1760 |
|
---|
1761 | <title>Configuring the Address of a NAT Network Interface</title>
|
---|
1762 |
|
---|
1763 | <para>
|
---|
1764 | In NAT mode, the guest network interface is assigned to the IPv4
|
---|
1765 | range <literal>10.0.<replaceable>x</replaceable>.0/24</literal>
|
---|
1766 | by default where <replaceable>x</replaceable> corresponds to the
|
---|
1767 | instance of the NAT interface +2. So
|
---|
1768 | <replaceable>x</replaceable> is 2 when there is only one NAT
|
---|
1769 | instance active. In that case the guest is assigned to the
|
---|
1770 | address <literal>10.0.2.15</literal>, the gateway is set to
|
---|
1771 | <literal>10.0.2.2</literal> and the name server can be found at
|
---|
1772 | <literal>10.0.2.3</literal>.
|
---|
1773 | </para>
|
---|
1774 |
|
---|
1775 | <para>
|
---|
1776 | If the NAT network needs to be changed, use the following
|
---|
1777 | command:
|
---|
1778 | </para>
|
---|
1779 |
|
---|
1780 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1781 | --natnet1 "192.168/16"</screen>
|
---|
1782 |
|
---|
1783 | <para>
|
---|
1784 | This command would reserve the network addresses from
|
---|
1785 | <literal>192.168.0.0</literal> to
|
---|
1786 | <literal>192.168.254.254</literal> for the first NAT network
|
---|
1787 | instance of <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> The guest IP
|
---|
1788 | would be assigned to <literal>192.168.0.15</literal> and the
|
---|
1789 | default gateway could be found at
|
---|
1790 | <literal>192.168.0.2</literal>.
|
---|
1791 | </para>
|
---|
1792 |
|
---|
1793 | </sect2>
|
---|
1794 |
|
---|
1795 | <sect2 id="nat-adv-tftp">
|
---|
1796 |
|
---|
1797 | <title>Configuring the Boot Server (Next Server) of a NAT Network Interface</title>
|
---|
1798 |
|
---|
1799 | <para>
|
---|
1800 | For network booting in NAT mode, by default &product-name; uses
|
---|
1801 | a built-in TFTP server at the IP address 10.0.2.4. This default
|
---|
1802 | behavior should work fine for typical remote-booting scenarios.
|
---|
1803 | However, it is possible to change the boot server IP and the
|
---|
1804 | location of the boot image with the following commands:
|
---|
1805 | </para>
|
---|
1806 |
|
---|
1807 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1808 | --nattftpserver1 10.0.2.2
|
---|
1809 | $ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1810 | --nattftpfile1 /srv/tftp/boot/MyPXEBoot.pxe</screen>
|
---|
1811 |
|
---|
1812 | </sect2>
|
---|
1813 |
|
---|
1814 | <sect2 id="nat-adv-settings">
|
---|
1815 |
|
---|
1816 | <title>Tuning TCP/IP Buffers for NAT</title>
|
---|
1817 |
|
---|
1818 | <para>
|
---|
1819 | The &product-name; NAT stack performance is often determined by
|
---|
1820 | its interaction with the host's TCP/IP stack and the size of
|
---|
1821 | several buffers, <literal>SO_RCVBUF</literal> and
|
---|
1822 | <literal>SO_SNDBUF</literal>. For certain setups users might
|
---|
1823 | want to adjust the buffer size for a better performance. This
|
---|
1824 | can by achieved using the following commands, where values are
|
---|
1825 | in kilobytes and can range from 8 to 1024:
|
---|
1826 | </para>
|
---|
1827 |
|
---|
1828 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1829 | --natsettings1 16000,128,128,0,0</screen>
|
---|
1830 |
|
---|
1831 | <para>
|
---|
1832 | This example illustrates tuning the NAT settings. The first
|
---|
1833 | parameter is the MTU, then the size of the socket's send buffer
|
---|
1834 | and the size of the socket's receive buffer, the initial size of
|
---|
1835 | the TCP send window, and lastly the initial size of the TCP
|
---|
1836 | receive window. Note that specifying zero means fallback to the
|
---|
1837 | default value.
|
---|
1838 | </para>
|
---|
1839 |
|
---|
1840 | <para>
|
---|
1841 | Each of these buffers has a default size of 64KB and default MTU
|
---|
1842 | is 1500.
|
---|
1843 | </para>
|
---|
1844 |
|
---|
1845 | </sect2>
|
---|
1846 |
|
---|
1847 | <sect2 id="nat-bind-sockets">
|
---|
1848 |
|
---|
1849 | <title>Binding NAT Sockets to a Specific Interface</title>
|
---|
1850 |
|
---|
1851 | <para>
|
---|
1852 | By default, &product-name;'s NAT engine will route TCP/IP
|
---|
1853 | packets through the default interface assigned by the host's
|
---|
1854 | TCP/IP stack. The technical reason for this is that the NAT
|
---|
1855 | engine uses sockets for communication. If you want to change
|
---|
1856 | this behavior, you can tell the NAT engine to bind to a
|
---|
1857 | particular IP address instead. For example, use the following
|
---|
1858 | command:
|
---|
1859 | </para>
|
---|
1860 |
|
---|
1861 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1862 | --natbindip1 "10.45.0.2"</screen>
|
---|
1863 |
|
---|
1864 | <para>
|
---|
1865 | After this, all outgoing traffic will be sent through the
|
---|
1866 | interface with the IP address 10.45.0.2. Ensure that this
|
---|
1867 | interface is up and running before changing the NAT bind
|
---|
1868 | address.
|
---|
1869 | </para>
|
---|
1870 |
|
---|
1871 | </sect2>
|
---|
1872 |
|
---|
1873 | <sect2 id="nat-adv-dns">
|
---|
1874 |
|
---|
1875 | <title>Enabling DNS Proxy in NAT Mode</title>
|
---|
1876 |
|
---|
1877 | <para>
|
---|
1878 | The NAT engine by default offers the same DNS servers to the
|
---|
1879 | guest that are configured on the host. In some scenarios, it can
|
---|
1880 | be desirable to hide the DNS server IPs from the guest, for
|
---|
1881 | example when this information can change on the host due to
|
---|
1882 | expiring DHCP leases. In this case, you can tell the NAT engine
|
---|
1883 | to act as DNS proxy using the following command:
|
---|
1884 | </para>
|
---|
1885 |
|
---|
1886 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --natdnsproxy1 on</screen>
|
---|
1887 |
|
---|
1888 | </sect2>
|
---|
1889 |
|
---|
1890 | <sect2 id="nat_host_resolver_proxy">
|
---|
1891 |
|
---|
1892 | <title>Using the Host's Resolver as a DNS Proxy in NAT Mode</title>
|
---|
1893 |
|
---|
1894 | <para>
|
---|
1895 | For resolving network names, the DHCP server of the NAT engine
|
---|
1896 | offers a list of registered DNS servers of the host. If for some
|
---|
1897 | reason you need to hide this DNS server list and use the host's
|
---|
1898 | resolver settings, thereby forcing the &product-name; NAT engine
|
---|
1899 | to intercept DNS requests and forward them to host's resolver,
|
---|
1900 | use the following command:
|
---|
1901 | </para>
|
---|
1902 |
|
---|
1903 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --natdnshostresolver1 on</screen>
|
---|
1904 |
|
---|
1905 | <para>
|
---|
1906 | Note that this setting is similar to the DNS proxy mode, however
|
---|
1907 | whereas the proxy mode just forwards DNS requests to the
|
---|
1908 | appropriate servers, the resolver mode will interpret the DNS
|
---|
1909 | requests and use the host's DNS API to query the information and
|
---|
1910 | return it to the guest.
|
---|
1911 | </para>
|
---|
1912 |
|
---|
1913 | <sect3 id="nat_host_resolver_name_intercepting">
|
---|
1914 |
|
---|
1915 | <title>User-Defined Host Name Resolving</title>
|
---|
1916 |
|
---|
1917 | <para>
|
---|
1918 | In some cases it might be useful to intercept the name
|
---|
1919 | resolving mechanism, providing a user-defined IP address on a
|
---|
1920 | particular DNS request. The intercepting mechanism enables the
|
---|
1921 | user to map not only a single host but domains and even more
|
---|
1922 | complex naming conventions if required.
|
---|
1923 | </para>
|
---|
1924 |
|
---|
1925 | <para>
|
---|
1926 | The following command sets a rule for mapping a name to a
|
---|
1927 | specified IP:
|
---|
1928 | </para>
|
---|
1929 |
|
---|
1930 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1931 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/{pcnet,e1000}/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/ \
|
---|
1932 | <replaceable>unique-rule-name-of-interception-rule</replaceable>/HostIP" <replaceable>IPv4</replaceable>
|
---|
1933 |
|
---|
1934 | VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1935 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/{pcnet,e1000}/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/ \
|
---|
1936 | <replaceable>unique-rule-name</replaceable>/HostName" <replaceable>hostname</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
1937 |
|
---|
1938 | <para>
|
---|
1939 | The following command sets a rule for mapping a pattern name
|
---|
1940 | to a specified IP:
|
---|
1941 | </para>
|
---|
1942 |
|
---|
1943 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1944 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/{pcnet,e1000}/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/ \
|
---|
1945 | <replaceable>unique-rule-name</replaceable>/HostIP" <replaceable>IPv4</replaceable>
|
---|
1946 |
|
---|
1947 | VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1948 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/{pcnet,e1000}/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/ \
|
---|
1949 | <replaceable>unique-rule-name</replaceable>/HostNamePattern" <replaceable>hostpattern</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
1950 |
|
---|
1951 | <para>
|
---|
1952 | The host name pattern can include the following wildcard
|
---|
1953 | characters: pipe (<literal>|</literal>), question mark
|
---|
1954 | (<literal>?</literal>), and asterisk (<literal>*</literal>).
|
---|
1955 | </para>
|
---|
1956 |
|
---|
1957 | <para>
|
---|
1958 | This example demonstrates how to instruct the host-resolver
|
---|
1959 | mechanism to resolve all domain and probably some mirrors of
|
---|
1960 | www.blocked-site.info site with IP 127.0.0.1:
|
---|
1961 | </para>
|
---|
1962 |
|
---|
1963 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1964 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/e1000/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/all_blocked_site/HostIP" 127.0.0.1
|
---|
1965 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1966 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/e1000/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/all_blocked_site/HostNamePattern" "*.blocked-site.*|*.fb.org"</screen>
|
---|
1967 |
|
---|
1968 | <para>
|
---|
1969 | The host resolver mechanism should be enabled to use
|
---|
1970 | user-defined mapping rules, otherwise they do not have any
|
---|
1971 | effect.
|
---|
1972 | </para>
|
---|
1973 |
|
---|
1974 | </sect3>
|
---|
1975 |
|
---|
1976 | </sect2>
|
---|
1977 |
|
---|
1978 | <sect2 id="nat-adv-alias">
|
---|
1979 |
|
---|
1980 | <title>Configuring Aliasing of the NAT Engine</title>
|
---|
1981 |
|
---|
1982 | <para>
|
---|
1983 | By default, the NAT core uses aliasing and uses random ports
|
---|
1984 | when generating an alias for a connection. This works well for
|
---|
1985 | the most protocols like SSH, FTP and so on. Though some
|
---|
1986 | protocols might need a more transparent behavior or may depend
|
---|
1987 | on the real port number the packet was sent from. You can change
|
---|
1988 | the NAT mode by using the following commands:
|
---|
1989 | </para>
|
---|
1990 |
|
---|
1991 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1992 | --nataliasmode1 proxyonly</screen>
|
---|
1993 |
|
---|
1994 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm "Linux Guest" --nataliasmode1 sameports</screen>
|
---|
1995 |
|
---|
1996 | <para>
|
---|
1997 | The first example disables aliasing and switches NAT into
|
---|
1998 | transparent mode, the second example enforces preserving of port
|
---|
1999 | values. These modes can be combined if necessary.
|
---|
2000 | </para>
|
---|
2001 |
|
---|
2002 | </sect2>
|
---|
2003 |
|
---|
2004 | </sect1>
|
---|
2005 |
|
---|
2006 | <sect1 id="changedmi">
|
---|
2007 |
|
---|
2008 | <title>Configuring the BIOS DMI Information</title>
|
---|
2009 |
|
---|
2010 | <para>
|
---|
2011 | The DMI data that &product-name; provides to guests can be changed
|
---|
2012 | for a specific VM. Use the following commands to configure the DMI
|
---|
2013 | BIOS information. In case your VM is configured to use EFI
|
---|
2014 | firmware you need to replace <literal>pcbios</literal> by
|
---|
2015 | <literal>efi</literal> in the keys.
|
---|
2016 | </para>
|
---|
2017 |
|
---|
2018 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
2019 |
|
---|
2020 | <listitem>
|
---|
2021 | <para>
|
---|
2022 | DMI BIOS information (type 0)
|
---|
2023 | </para>
|
---|
2024 |
|
---|
2025 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2026 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSVendor" "BIOS Vendor"
|
---|
2027 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2028 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSVersion" "BIOS Version"
|
---|
2029 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2030 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSReleaseDate" "BIOS Release Date"
|
---|
2031 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2032 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSReleaseMajor" 1
|
---|
2033 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2034 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSReleaseMinor" 2
|
---|
2035 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2036 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSFirmwareMajor" 3
|
---|
2037 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2038 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSFirmwareMinor" 4</screen>
|
---|
2039 | </listitem>
|
---|
2040 |
|
---|
2041 | <listitem>
|
---|
2042 | <para>
|
---|
2043 | DMI system information (type 1)
|
---|
2044 | </para>
|
---|
2045 |
|
---|
2046 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2047 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemVendor" "System Vendor"
|
---|
2048 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2049 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemProduct" "System Product"
|
---|
2050 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2051 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemVersion" "System Version"
|
---|
2052 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2053 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemSerial" "System Serial"
|
---|
2054 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2055 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemSKU" "System SKU"
|
---|
2056 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2057 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemFamily" "System Family"
|
---|
2058 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2059 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemUuid" \
|
---|
2060 | "9852bf98-b83c-49db-a8de-182c42c7226b"</screen>
|
---|
2061 | </listitem>
|
---|
2062 |
|
---|
2063 | <listitem>
|
---|
2064 | <para>
|
---|
2065 | DMI board information (type 2)
|
---|
2066 | </para>
|
---|
2067 |
|
---|
2068 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2069 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardVendor" "Board Vendor"
|
---|
2070 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2071 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardProduct" "Board Product"
|
---|
2072 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2073 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardVersion" "Board Version"
|
---|
2074 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2075 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardSerial" "Board Serial"
|
---|
2076 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2077 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardAssetTag" "Board Tag"
|
---|
2078 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2079 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardLocInChass" "Board Location"
|
---|
2080 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2081 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardBoardType" 10</screen>
|
---|
2082 | </listitem>
|
---|
2083 |
|
---|
2084 | <listitem>
|
---|
2085 | <para>
|
---|
2086 | DMI system enclosure or chassis (type 3)
|
---|
2087 | </para>
|
---|
2088 |
|
---|
2089 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2090 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisVendor" "Chassis Vendor"
|
---|
2091 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2092 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisType" 3
|
---|
2093 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2094 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisVersion" "Chassis Version"
|
---|
2095 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2096 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisSerial" "Chassis Serial"
|
---|
2097 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2098 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisAssetTag" "Chassis Tag"</screen>
|
---|
2099 | </listitem>
|
---|
2100 |
|
---|
2101 | <listitem>
|
---|
2102 | <para>
|
---|
2103 | DMI processor information (type 4)
|
---|
2104 | </para>
|
---|
2105 |
|
---|
2106 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2107 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiProcManufacturer" "GenuineIntel"
|
---|
2108 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2109 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiProcVersion" "Pentium(R) III"</screen>
|
---|
2110 | </listitem>
|
---|
2111 |
|
---|
2112 | <listitem>
|
---|
2113 | <para>
|
---|
2114 | DMI OEM strings (type 11)
|
---|
2115 | </para>
|
---|
2116 |
|
---|
2117 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2118 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiOEMVBoxVer" "vboxVer_1.2.3"
|
---|
2119 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2120 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiOEMVBoxRev" "vboxRev_12345"</screen>
|
---|
2121 | </listitem>
|
---|
2122 |
|
---|
2123 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
2124 |
|
---|
2125 | <para>
|
---|
2126 | If a DMI string is not set, the default value of &product-name; is
|
---|
2127 | used. To set an empty string use
|
---|
2128 | <literal>"<EMPTY>"</literal>.
|
---|
2129 | </para>
|
---|
2130 |
|
---|
2131 | <para>
|
---|
2132 | Note that in the above list, all quoted parameters (DmiBIOSVendor,
|
---|
2133 | DmiBIOSVersion but not DmiBIOSReleaseMajor) are expected to be
|
---|
2134 | strings. If such a string is a valid number, the parameter is
|
---|
2135 | treated as number and the VM will most probably refuse to start
|
---|
2136 | with an <literal>VERR_CFGM_NOT_STRING</literal> error. In that
|
---|
2137 | case, use
|
---|
2138 | <literal>"string:<replaceable>value</replaceable>"</literal>. For
|
---|
2139 | example:
|
---|
2140 | </para>
|
---|
2141 |
|
---|
2142 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2143 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemSerial" "string:1234"</screen>
|
---|
2144 |
|
---|
2145 | <para>
|
---|
2146 | Changing this information can be necessary to provide the DMI
|
---|
2147 | information of the host to the guest to prevent Windows from
|
---|
2148 | asking for a new product key. On Linux hosts, the DMI BIOS
|
---|
2149 | information can be obtained with the following command:
|
---|
2150 | </para>
|
---|
2151 |
|
---|
2152 | <screen>$ dmidecode -t0</screen>
|
---|
2153 |
|
---|
2154 | <para>
|
---|
2155 | The DMI system information can be obtained as follows:
|
---|
2156 | </para>
|
---|
2157 |
|
---|
2158 | <screen>$ dmidecode -t1</screen>
|
---|
2159 |
|
---|
2160 | </sect1>
|
---|
2161 |
|
---|
2162 | <sect1 id="changeacpicust">
|
---|
2163 |
|
---|
2164 | <title>Configuring Custom ACPI Tables</title>
|
---|
2165 |
|
---|
2166 | <para>
|
---|
2167 | You can configure &product-name; to present up to four custom ACPI
|
---|
2168 | tables to the guest. Use a command such as the following to
|
---|
2169 | configure custom ACPI tables. Note that
|
---|
2170 | <literal>CustomTable1</literal>, <literal>CustomTable2</literal>,
|
---|
2171 | and <literal>CustomTable3</literal> are available in addition to
|
---|
2172 | <literal>CustomTable0</literal>.
|
---|
2173 | </para>
|
---|
2174 |
|
---|
2175 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2176 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/acpi/0/Config/CustomTable0" "/<replaceable>path-to-table</replaceable>.bin"</screen>
|
---|
2177 |
|
---|
2178 | <para>
|
---|
2179 | Configuring custom ACPI tables can for example avoid the need for
|
---|
2180 | asking for a new product key on Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows
|
---|
2181 | 8 and later guests. On Linux hosts, one of the system's ACPI
|
---|
2182 | tables can be read from
|
---|
2183 | <filename>/sys/firmware/acpi/tables/</filename>.
|
---|
2184 | </para>
|
---|
2185 |
|
---|
2186 | </sect1>
|
---|
2187 |
|
---|
2188 | <sect1 id="fine-tune-timers">
|
---|
2189 |
|
---|
2190 | <title>Fine Tuning Timers and Time Synchronization</title>
|
---|
2191 |
|
---|
2192 | <sect2 id="changetscmode">
|
---|
2193 |
|
---|
2194 | <title>Configuring the Guest Time Stamp Counter (TSC) to Reflect Guest
|
---|
2195 | Execution</title>
|
---|
2196 |
|
---|
2197 | <para>
|
---|
2198 | By default, &product-name; keeps all sources of time visible to
|
---|
2199 | the guest synchronized to a single time source, the monotonic
|
---|
2200 | host time. This reflects the assumptions of many guest operating
|
---|
2201 | systems, which expect all time sources to reflect "wall clock"
|
---|
2202 | time. In special circumstances it may be useful however to make
|
---|
2203 | the time stamp counter (TSC) in the guest reflect the time
|
---|
2204 | actually spent executing the guest.
|
---|
2205 | </para>
|
---|
2206 |
|
---|
2207 | <para>
|
---|
2208 | This special TSC handling mode can be enabled on a per-VM basis,
|
---|
2209 | and for best results must be used only in combination with
|
---|
2210 | hardware virtualization. To enable this mode use the following
|
---|
2211 | command:
|
---|
2212 | </para>
|
---|
2213 |
|
---|
2214 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/TM/TSCTiedToExecution" 1</screen>
|
---|
2215 |
|
---|
2216 | <para>
|
---|
2217 | To revert to the default TSC handling mode use:
|
---|
2218 | </para>
|
---|
2219 |
|
---|
2220 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/TM/TSCTiedToExecution"</screen>
|
---|
2221 |
|
---|
2222 | <para>
|
---|
2223 | Note that if you use the special TSC handling mode with a guest
|
---|
2224 | operating system which is very strict about the consistency of
|
---|
2225 | time sources you may get a warning or error message about the
|
---|
2226 | timing inconsistency. It may also cause clocks to become
|
---|
2227 | unreliable with some guest operating systems depending on how
|
---|
2228 | they use the TSC.
|
---|
2229 | </para>
|
---|
2230 |
|
---|
2231 | </sect2>
|
---|
2232 |
|
---|
2233 | <sect2 id="warpguest">
|
---|
2234 |
|
---|
2235 | <title>Accelerate or Slow Down the Guest Clock</title>
|
---|
2236 |
|
---|
2237 | <para>
|
---|
2238 | For certain purposes it can be useful to accelerate or to slow
|
---|
2239 | down the virtual guest clock. This can be achieved as follows:
|
---|
2240 | </para>
|
---|
2241 |
|
---|
2242 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/TM/WarpDrivePercentage" 200</screen>
|
---|
2243 |
|
---|
2244 | <para>
|
---|
2245 | The above example will double the speed of the guest clock while
|
---|
2246 | </para>
|
---|
2247 |
|
---|
2248 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/TM/WarpDrivePercentage" 50</screen>
|
---|
2249 |
|
---|
2250 | <para>
|
---|
2251 | will halve the speed of the guest clock. Note that changing the
|
---|
2252 | rate of the virtual clock can confuse the guest and can even
|
---|
2253 | lead to abnormal guest behavior. For instance, a higher clock
|
---|
2254 | rate means shorter timeouts for virtual devices with the result
|
---|
2255 | that a slightly increased response time of a virtual device due
|
---|
2256 | to an increased host load can cause guest failures. Note further
|
---|
2257 | that any time synchronization mechanism will frequently try to
|
---|
2258 | resynchronize the guest clock with the reference clock, which is
|
---|
2259 | the host clock if the &product-name; Guest Additions are active.
|
---|
2260 | Therefore any time synchronization should be disabled if the
|
---|
2261 | rate of the guest clock is changed as described above. See
|
---|
2262 | <xref linkend="changetimesync" />.
|
---|
2263 | </para>
|
---|
2264 |
|
---|
2265 | </sect2>
|
---|
2266 |
|
---|
2267 | <sect2 id="changetimesync">
|
---|
2268 |
|
---|
2269 | <title>Tuning the Guest Additions Time Synchronization Parameters</title>
|
---|
2270 |
|
---|
2271 | <para>
|
---|
2272 | The &product-name; Guest Additions ensure that the guest's
|
---|
2273 | system time is synchronized with the host time. There are
|
---|
2274 | several parameters which can be tuned. The parameters can be set
|
---|
2275 | for a specific VM using the following command:
|
---|
2276 | </para>
|
---|
2277 |
|
---|
2278 | <screen>$ VBoxManage guestproperty set <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "/VirtualBox/GuestAdd/VBoxService/<replaceable>property</replaceable>" <replaceable>value</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
2279 |
|
---|
2280 | <para>
|
---|
2281 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
2282 | </para>
|
---|
2283 |
|
---|
2284 | <variablelist>
|
---|
2285 |
|
---|
2286 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2287 | <term>
|
---|
2288 | <option>--timesync-interval</option>
|
---|
2289 | </term>
|
---|
2290 |
|
---|
2291 | <listitem>
|
---|
2292 | <para>
|
---|
2293 | Specifies the interval at which to synchronize the time
|
---|
2294 | with the host. The default is 10000 ms (10 seconds).
|
---|
2295 | </para>
|
---|
2296 | </listitem>
|
---|
2297 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2298 |
|
---|
2299 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2300 | <term>
|
---|
2301 | <option>--timesync-min-adjust</option>
|
---|
2302 | </term>
|
---|
2303 |
|
---|
2304 | <listitem>
|
---|
2305 | <para>
|
---|
2306 | The minimum absolute drift value measured in milliseconds
|
---|
2307 | to make adjustments for. The default is 1000 ms on OS/2
|
---|
2308 | and 100 ms elsewhere.
|
---|
2309 | </para>
|
---|
2310 | </listitem>
|
---|
2311 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2312 |
|
---|
2313 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2314 | <term>
|
---|
2315 | <option>--timesync-latency-factor</option>
|
---|
2316 | </term>
|
---|
2317 |
|
---|
2318 | <listitem>
|
---|
2319 | <para>
|
---|
2320 | The factor to multiply the time query latency with to
|
---|
2321 | calculate the dynamic minimum adjust time. The default is
|
---|
2322 | 8 times, which means as follows:
|
---|
2323 | </para>
|
---|
2324 |
|
---|
2325 | <para>
|
---|
2326 | Measure the time it takes to determine the host time, the
|
---|
2327 | guest has to contact the VM host service which may take
|
---|
2328 | some time. Multiply this value by 8 and do an adjustment
|
---|
2329 | only if the time difference between host and guest is
|
---|
2330 | bigger than this value. Do not do any time adjustment
|
---|
2331 | otherwise.
|
---|
2332 | </para>
|
---|
2333 | </listitem>
|
---|
2334 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2335 |
|
---|
2336 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2337 | <term>
|
---|
2338 | <option>--timesync-max-latency</option>
|
---|
2339 | </term>
|
---|
2340 |
|
---|
2341 | <listitem>
|
---|
2342 | <para>
|
---|
2343 | The max host timer query latency to accept. The default is
|
---|
2344 | 250 ms.
|
---|
2345 | </para>
|
---|
2346 | </listitem>
|
---|
2347 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2348 |
|
---|
2349 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2350 | <term>
|
---|
2351 | <option>--timesync-set-threshold</option>
|
---|
2352 | </term>
|
---|
2353 |
|
---|
2354 | <listitem>
|
---|
2355 | <para>
|
---|
2356 | The absolute drift threshold, given as milliseconds where
|
---|
2357 | to start setting the time instead of trying to smoothly
|
---|
2358 | adjust it. The default is 20 minutes.
|
---|
2359 | </para>
|
---|
2360 | </listitem>
|
---|
2361 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2362 |
|
---|
2363 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2364 | <term>
|
---|
2365 | <option>--timesync-set-start</option>
|
---|
2366 | </term>
|
---|
2367 |
|
---|
2368 | <listitem>
|
---|
2369 | <para>
|
---|
2370 | Set the time when starting the time sync service.
|
---|
2371 | </para>
|
---|
2372 | </listitem>
|
---|
2373 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2374 |
|
---|
2375 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2376 | <term>
|
---|
2377 | <option>--timesync-set-on-restore 0|1</option>
|
---|
2378 | </term>
|
---|
2379 |
|
---|
2380 | <listitem>
|
---|
2381 | <para>
|
---|
2382 | Set the time after the VM was restored from a saved state
|
---|
2383 | when passing 1 as parameter. This is the default. Disable
|
---|
2384 | by passing 0. In the latter case, the time will be
|
---|
2385 | adjusted smoothly, which can take a long time.
|
---|
2386 | </para>
|
---|
2387 | </listitem>
|
---|
2388 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2389 |
|
---|
2390 | </variablelist>
|
---|
2391 |
|
---|
2392 | <para>
|
---|
2393 | All these parameters can be specified as command line parameters
|
---|
2394 | to VBoxService as well.
|
---|
2395 | </para>
|
---|
2396 |
|
---|
2397 | </sect2>
|
---|
2398 |
|
---|
2399 | <sect2 id="disabletimesync">
|
---|
2400 |
|
---|
2401 | <title>Disabling the Guest Additions Time Synchronization</title>
|
---|
2402 |
|
---|
2403 | <para>
|
---|
2404 | Once installed and started, the &product-name; Guest Additions
|
---|
2405 | will try to synchronize the guest time with the host time. This
|
---|
2406 | can be prevented by forbidding the guest service from reading
|
---|
2407 | the host clock:
|
---|
2408 | </para>
|
---|
2409 |
|
---|
2410 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/Devices/VMMDev/0/Config/GetHostTimeDisabled" 1</screen>
|
---|
2411 |
|
---|
2412 | </sect2>
|
---|
2413 |
|
---|
2414 | </sect1>
|
---|
2415 |
|
---|
2416 | <sect1 id="vboxbowsolaris11">
|
---|
2417 |
|
---|
2418 | <title>Installing the Alternate Bridged Networking Driver on Oracle Solaris 11
|
---|
2419 | Hosts</title>
|
---|
2420 |
|
---|
2421 | <para>
|
---|
2422 | &product-name; includes a network filter driver that utilizes
|
---|
2423 | Oracle Solaris 11's Crossbow functionality. By default, this new
|
---|
2424 | driver is installed for Oracle Solaris 11 hosts that have support
|
---|
2425 | for it.
|
---|
2426 | </para>
|
---|
2427 |
|
---|
2428 | <para>
|
---|
2429 | To force installation of the older STREAMS based network filter
|
---|
2430 | driver, execute as root the following command before installing
|
---|
2431 | the &product-name; package:
|
---|
2432 | </para>
|
---|
2433 |
|
---|
2434 | <screen>$ touch /etc/vboxinst_vboxflt</screen>
|
---|
2435 |
|
---|
2436 | <para>
|
---|
2437 | To force installation of the Crossbow based network filter driver,
|
---|
2438 | execute as root the following command before installing the
|
---|
2439 | &product-name; package:
|
---|
2440 | </para>
|
---|
2441 |
|
---|
2442 | <screen>$ touch /etc/vboxinst_vboxbow</screen>
|
---|
2443 |
|
---|
2444 | <para>
|
---|
2445 | To check which driver is currently being used by &product-name;,
|
---|
2446 | execute:
|
---|
2447 | </para>
|
---|
2448 |
|
---|
2449 | <screen>$ modinfo | grep vbox</screen>
|
---|
2450 |
|
---|
2451 | <para>
|
---|
2452 | If the output contains "vboxbow", it indicates &product-name; is
|
---|
2453 | using the Crossbow network filter driver, while the name "vboxflt"
|
---|
2454 | indicates usage of the older STREAMS network filter.
|
---|
2455 | </para>
|
---|
2456 |
|
---|
2457 | </sect1>
|
---|
2458 |
|
---|
2459 | <sect1 id="vboxbowvnictemplates">
|
---|
2460 |
|
---|
2461 | <title>&product-name; VNIC Templates for VLANs on Oracle Solaris 11 Hosts</title>
|
---|
2462 |
|
---|
2463 | <para>
|
---|
2464 | &product-name; supports Virtual Network Interface (VNIC) templates
|
---|
2465 | for configuring VMs over VLANs. An &product-name; VNIC template is
|
---|
2466 | a VNIC whose name starts with
|
---|
2467 | <filename>vboxvnic_template</filename>. The string is
|
---|
2468 | case-sensitive.
|
---|
2469 | </para>
|
---|
2470 |
|
---|
2471 | <para>
|
---|
2472 | On Oracle Solaris 11 hosts, when Crossbow-based bridged networking
|
---|
2473 | is used, a VNIC template may be used to specify the VLAN ID to use
|
---|
2474 | while bridging over a network link.
|
---|
2475 | </para>
|
---|
2476 |
|
---|
2477 | <para>
|
---|
2478 | The following is an example of how to use a VNIC template to
|
---|
2479 | configure a VM over a VLAN. Create an &product-name; VNIC
|
---|
2480 | template, by executing as root:
|
---|
2481 | </para>
|
---|
2482 |
|
---|
2483 | <screen># dladm create-vnic -t -l nge0 -v 23 vboxvnic_template0</screen>
|
---|
2484 |
|
---|
2485 | <para>
|
---|
2486 | This will create a temporary VNIC template over interface
|
---|
2487 | <command>nge0</command> with the VLAN ID 23. To create VNIC
|
---|
2488 | templates that are persistent across host reboots, skip the
|
---|
2489 | <option>-t</option> parameter in the above command. You may check
|
---|
2490 | the current state of links using the following command:
|
---|
2491 | </para>
|
---|
2492 |
|
---|
2493 | <screen>$ dladm show-link
|
---|
2494 | LINK CLASS MTU STATE BRIDGE OVER
|
---|
2495 | nge0 phys 1500 up -- --
|
---|
2496 | nge1 phys 1500 down -- --
|
---|
2497 | vboxvnic_template0 vnic 1500 up -- nge0
|
---|
2498 |
|
---|
2499 | $ dladm show-vnic
|
---|
2500 | LINK OVER SPEED MACADDRESS MACADDRTYPE VID
|
---|
2501 | vboxvnic_template0 nge0 1000 2:8:20:25:12:75 random 23</screen>
|
---|
2502 |
|
---|
2503 | <para>
|
---|
2504 | Once the VNIC template is created, any VMs that need to be on VLAN
|
---|
2505 | 23 over the interface <command>nge0</command> can be configured to
|
---|
2506 | bridge using this VNIC template.
|
---|
2507 | </para>
|
---|
2508 |
|
---|
2509 | <para>
|
---|
2510 | VNIC templates makes managing VMs on VLANs simpler and efficient.
|
---|
2511 | The VLAN details are not stored as part of every VM's
|
---|
2512 | configuration but rather inherited from the VNIC template while
|
---|
2513 | starting the VM. The VNIC template itself can be modified anytime
|
---|
2514 | using the <command>dladm</command> command.
|
---|
2515 | </para>
|
---|
2516 |
|
---|
2517 | <para>
|
---|
2518 | VNIC templates can be created with additional properties such as
|
---|
2519 | bandwidth limits and CPU fanout. Refer to your Oracle Solaris
|
---|
2520 | network documentation for details. The additional properties are
|
---|
2521 | also applied to VMs which bridge using the VNIC template.
|
---|
2522 | </para>
|
---|
2523 |
|
---|
2524 | </sect1>
|
---|
2525 |
|
---|
2526 | <sect1 id="addhostonlysolaris">
|
---|
2527 |
|
---|
2528 | <title>Configuring Multiple Host-Only Network Interfaces on Oracle Solaris
|
---|
2529 | Hosts</title>
|
---|
2530 |
|
---|
2531 | <para>
|
---|
2532 | By default &product-name; provides you with one host-only network
|
---|
2533 | interface. Adding more host-only network interfaces on Oracle
|
---|
2534 | Solaris hosts requires manual configuration. Here is how to add
|
---|
2535 | another host-only network interface.
|
---|
2536 | </para>
|
---|
2537 |
|
---|
2538 | <para>
|
---|
2539 | Begin by stopping all running VMs. Then, unplumb the existing
|
---|
2540 | "vboxnet0" interface by execute the following command as root:
|
---|
2541 | </para>
|
---|
2542 |
|
---|
2543 | <screen># ifconfig vboxnet0 unplumb</screen>
|
---|
2544 |
|
---|
2545 | <para>
|
---|
2546 | If you have several vboxnet interfaces, you will need to unplumb
|
---|
2547 | all of them. Once all vboxnet interfaces are unplumbed, remove the
|
---|
2548 | driver by executing the following command as root:
|
---|
2549 | </para>
|
---|
2550 |
|
---|
2551 | <screen># rem_drv vboxnet</screen>
|
---|
2552 |
|
---|
2553 | <para>
|
---|
2554 | Edit the file
|
---|
2555 | <filename>/platform/i86pc/kernel/drv/vboxnet.conf</filename> and
|
---|
2556 | add a line for the new interface we want to add as shown below:
|
---|
2557 | </para>
|
---|
2558 |
|
---|
2559 | <screen>name="vboxnet" parent="pseudo" instance=1;
|
---|
2560 | name="vboxnet" parent="pseudo" instance=2;</screen>
|
---|
2561 |
|
---|
2562 | <para>
|
---|
2563 | Add as many of these lines as required with each line having a
|
---|
2564 | unique instance number.
|
---|
2565 | </para>
|
---|
2566 |
|
---|
2567 | <para>
|
---|
2568 | Next, reload the vboxnet driver by executing the following command
|
---|
2569 | as root:
|
---|
2570 | </para>
|
---|
2571 |
|
---|
2572 | <screen># add_drv vboxnet</screen>
|
---|
2573 |
|
---|
2574 | <para>
|
---|
2575 | On Oracle Solaris 11.1 and newer hosts you may want to rename the
|
---|
2576 | default vanity interface name. To check what name has been
|
---|
2577 | assigned, execute:
|
---|
2578 | </para>
|
---|
2579 |
|
---|
2580 | <screen>$ dladm show-phys
|
---|
2581 | LINK MEDIA STATE SPEED DUPLEX DEVICE
|
---|
2582 | net0 Ethernet up 100 full e1000g0
|
---|
2583 | net2 Ethernet up 1000 full vboxnet1
|
---|
2584 | net1 Ethernet up 1000 full vboxnet0</screen>
|
---|
2585 |
|
---|
2586 | <para>
|
---|
2587 | In the above example, we can rename "net2" to "vboxnet1" before
|
---|
2588 | proceeding to plumb the interface. This can be done by executing
|
---|
2589 | as root:
|
---|
2590 | </para>
|
---|
2591 |
|
---|
2592 | <screen># dladm rename-link net2 vboxnet1</screen>
|
---|
2593 |
|
---|
2594 | <para>
|
---|
2595 | Now plumb all the interfaces using <command>ifconfig
|
---|
2596 | vboxnet<replaceable>X</replaceable> plumb</command>, where
|
---|
2597 | <replaceable>X</replaceable> would be 1 in this case. Once the
|
---|
2598 | interface is plumbed, it may be configured like any other network
|
---|
2599 | interface. Refer to the <command>ifconfig</command> documentation
|
---|
2600 | for further details.
|
---|
2601 | </para>
|
---|
2602 |
|
---|
2603 | <para>
|
---|
2604 | To make the settings for the newly added interfaces persistent
|
---|
2605 | across reboots, you will need to edit the files
|
---|
2606 | <filename>/etc/inet/netmasks</filename>, and if you are using NWAM
|
---|
2607 | <filename>/etc/nwam/llp</filename> and add the appropriate entries
|
---|
2608 | to set the netmask and static IP for each of those interfaces. The
|
---|
2609 | &product-name; installer only updates these configuration files
|
---|
2610 | for the one "vboxnet0" interface it creates by default.
|
---|
2611 | </para>
|
---|
2612 |
|
---|
2613 | </sect1>
|
---|
2614 |
|
---|
2615 | <sect1 id="solariscodedumper">
|
---|
2616 |
|
---|
2617 | <title>Configuring the &product-name; CoreDumper on Oracle Solaris Hosts</title>
|
---|
2618 |
|
---|
2619 | <para>
|
---|
2620 | &product-name; is capable of producing its own core files for
|
---|
2621 | extensive debugging when things go wrong. Currently this is only
|
---|
2622 | available on Oracle Solaris hosts.
|
---|
2623 | </para>
|
---|
2624 |
|
---|
2625 | <para>
|
---|
2626 | The &product-name; CoreDumper can be enabled using the following
|
---|
2627 | command:
|
---|
2628 | </para>
|
---|
2629 |
|
---|
2630 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> VBoxInternal2/CoreDumpEnabled 1</screen>
|
---|
2631 |
|
---|
2632 | <para>
|
---|
2633 | You can specify which directory to use for core dumps with this
|
---|
2634 | command, as follows:
|
---|
2635 | </para>
|
---|
2636 |
|
---|
2637 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> VBoxInternal2/CoreDumpDir <replaceable>path-to-directory</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
2638 |
|
---|
2639 | <para>
|
---|
2640 | Make sure the directory you specify is on a volume with sufficient
|
---|
2641 | free space and that the &product-name; process has sufficient
|
---|
2642 | permissions to write files to this directory. If you skip this
|
---|
2643 | command and do not specify any core dump directory, the current
|
---|
2644 | directory of the &product-name; executable will be used. This
|
---|
2645 | would most likely fail when writing cores as they are protected
|
---|
2646 | with root permissions. It is recommended you explicitly set a core
|
---|
2647 | dump directory.
|
---|
2648 | </para>
|
---|
2649 |
|
---|
2650 | <para>
|
---|
2651 | You must specify when the &product-name; CoreDumper should be
|
---|
2652 | triggered. This is done using the following commands:
|
---|
2653 | </para>
|
---|
2654 |
|
---|
2655 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> VBoxInternal2/CoreDumpReplaceSystemDump 1
|
---|
2656 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> VBoxInternal2/CoreDumpLive 1</screen>
|
---|
2657 |
|
---|
2658 | <para>
|
---|
2659 | At least one of the above two commands will have to be provided if
|
---|
2660 | you have enabled the &product-name; CoreDumper.
|
---|
2661 | </para>
|
---|
2662 |
|
---|
2663 | <para>
|
---|
2664 | Setting <literal>CoreDumpReplaceSystemDump</literal> sets up the
|
---|
2665 | VM to override the host's core dumping mechanism and in the event
|
---|
2666 | of any crash only the &product-name; CoreDumper would produce the
|
---|
2667 | core file.
|
---|
2668 | </para>
|
---|
2669 |
|
---|
2670 | <para>
|
---|
2671 | Setting <literal>CoreDumpLive</literal> sets up the VM to produce
|
---|
2672 | cores whenever the VM process receives a
|
---|
2673 | <literal>SIGUSR2</literal> signal. After producing the core file,
|
---|
2674 | the VM will not be terminated and will continue to run. You can
|
---|
2675 | thus take cores of the VM process using the following command:
|
---|
2676 | </para>
|
---|
2677 |
|
---|
2678 | <screen>$ kill -s SIGUSR2 <replaceable>VM-process-id</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
2679 |
|
---|
2680 | <para>
|
---|
2681 | The &product-name; CoreDumper creates core files of the form
|
---|
2682 | <filename>core.vb.<replaceable>process-name</replaceable>.<replaceable>process-ID</replaceable></filename>
|
---|
2683 | such as <filename>core.vb.VBoxHeadless.11321</filename>.
|
---|
2684 | </para>
|
---|
2685 |
|
---|
2686 | </sect1>
|
---|
2687 |
|
---|
2688 | <sect1 id="vboxandsolzvmm">
|
---|
2689 |
|
---|
2690 | <title>&product-name; and Oracle Solaris Kernel Zones</title>
|
---|
2691 |
|
---|
2692 | <para>
|
---|
2693 | Oracle Solaris kernel zones on x86-based systems make use of
|
---|
2694 | hardware-assisted virtualization features like &product-name;
|
---|
2695 | does. However, for kernel zones and &product-name; to share this
|
---|
2696 | hardware resource, they need to cooperate.
|
---|
2697 | </para>
|
---|
2698 |
|
---|
2699 | <para>
|
---|
2700 | By default, due to performance reasons, &product-name; acquires
|
---|
2701 | the hardware-assisted virtualization resource (VT-x/AMD-V)
|
---|
2702 | globally on the host machine and uses it until the last
|
---|
2703 | &product-name; VM that requires it is powered off. This prevents
|
---|
2704 | other software from using VT-x/AMD-V during the time
|
---|
2705 | &product-name; has taken control of it.
|
---|
2706 | </para>
|
---|
2707 |
|
---|
2708 | <para>
|
---|
2709 | &product-name; can be instructed to relinquish use of
|
---|
2710 | hardware-assisted virtualization features when not executing guest
|
---|
2711 | code, thereby allowing kernel zones to make use of them. To do
|
---|
2712 | this, shutdown all &product-name; VMs and execute the following
|
---|
2713 | command:
|
---|
2714 | </para>
|
---|
2715 |
|
---|
2716 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setproperty hwvirtexclusive off</screen>
|
---|
2717 |
|
---|
2718 | <para>
|
---|
2719 | This command needs to be executed only once as the setting is
|
---|
2720 | stored as part of the global &product-name; settings which will
|
---|
2721 | continue to persist across host-reboots and &product-name;
|
---|
2722 | upgrades.
|
---|
2723 | </para>
|
---|
2724 |
|
---|
2725 | </sect1>
|
---|
2726 |
|
---|
2727 | <sect1 id="guitweaks">
|
---|
2728 |
|
---|
2729 | <title>Locking Down the &product-name; GUI</title>
|
---|
2730 |
|
---|
2731 | <sect2 id="customize-vm-manager">
|
---|
2732 |
|
---|
2733 | <title>Customizing the VirtualBox Manager</title>
|
---|
2734 |
|
---|
2735 | <para>
|
---|
2736 | There are several advanced customization settings for locking
|
---|
2737 | down the VirtualBox Manager. Locking down means removing some
|
---|
2738 | features that the user should not see.
|
---|
2739 | </para>
|
---|
2740 |
|
---|
2741 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Customizations <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable> ...]</screen>
|
---|
2742 |
|
---|
2743 | <para>
|
---|
2744 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following
|
---|
2745 | properties:
|
---|
2746 | </para>
|
---|
2747 |
|
---|
2748 | <variablelist>
|
---|
2749 |
|
---|
2750 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2751 | <term>
|
---|
2752 | <literal>noSelector</literal>
|
---|
2753 | </term>
|
---|
2754 |
|
---|
2755 | <listitem>
|
---|
2756 | <para>
|
---|
2757 | Do not allow users to start the VirtualBox Manager. Trying
|
---|
2758 | to do so will show a window containing a proper error
|
---|
2759 | message.
|
---|
2760 | </para>
|
---|
2761 | </listitem>
|
---|
2762 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2763 |
|
---|
2764 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2765 | <term>
|
---|
2766 | <literal>noMenuBar</literal>
|
---|
2767 | </term>
|
---|
2768 |
|
---|
2769 | <listitem>
|
---|
2770 | <para>
|
---|
2771 | VM windows will not contain a menu bar.
|
---|
2772 | </para>
|
---|
2773 | </listitem>
|
---|
2774 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2775 |
|
---|
2776 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2777 | <term>
|
---|
2778 | <literal>noStatusBar</literal>
|
---|
2779 | </term>
|
---|
2780 |
|
---|
2781 | <listitem>
|
---|
2782 | <para>
|
---|
2783 | VM windows will not contain a status bar.
|
---|
2784 | </para>
|
---|
2785 | </listitem>
|
---|
2786 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2787 |
|
---|
2788 | </variablelist>
|
---|
2789 |
|
---|
2790 | <para>
|
---|
2791 | To disable any of these VirtualBox Manager customizations use
|
---|
2792 | the following command:
|
---|
2793 | </para>
|
---|
2794 |
|
---|
2795 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Customizations</screen>
|
---|
2796 |
|
---|
2797 | </sect2>
|
---|
2798 |
|
---|
2799 | <sect2 id="customize-vm-selector">
|
---|
2800 |
|
---|
2801 | <title>VM Selector Customization</title>
|
---|
2802 |
|
---|
2803 | <para>
|
---|
2804 | The following per-machine VM extradata settings can be used to
|
---|
2805 | change the behavior of the VM selector window in respect of
|
---|
2806 | certain VMs:
|
---|
2807 | </para>
|
---|
2808 |
|
---|
2809 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> <replaceable>property</replaceable> true</screen>
|
---|
2810 |
|
---|
2811 | <para>
|
---|
2812 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> can be any of the following:
|
---|
2813 | </para>
|
---|
2814 |
|
---|
2815 | <variablelist>
|
---|
2816 |
|
---|
2817 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2818 | <term>
|
---|
2819 | <literal>GUI/HideDetails</literal>
|
---|
2820 | </term>
|
---|
2821 |
|
---|
2822 | <listitem>
|
---|
2823 | <para>
|
---|
2824 | Do not show the VM configuration of a certain VM. The
|
---|
2825 | details window will remain just empty if this VM is
|
---|
2826 | selected.
|
---|
2827 | </para>
|
---|
2828 | </listitem>
|
---|
2829 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2830 |
|
---|
2831 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2832 | <term>
|
---|
2833 | <literal>GUI/PreventReconfiguration</literal>
|
---|
2834 | </term>
|
---|
2835 |
|
---|
2836 | <listitem>
|
---|
2837 | <para>
|
---|
2838 | Do not allow the user to open the
|
---|
2839 | <emphasis role="bold">Settings</emphasis> dialog for a
|
---|
2840 | certain VM.
|
---|
2841 | </para>
|
---|
2842 | </listitem>
|
---|
2843 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2844 |
|
---|
2845 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2846 | <term>
|
---|
2847 | <literal>GUI/PreventSnapshotOperations</literal>
|
---|
2848 | </term>
|
---|
2849 |
|
---|
2850 | <listitem>
|
---|
2851 | <para>
|
---|
2852 | Prevent snapshot operations for a VM from the GUI, either
|
---|
2853 | at runtime or when the VM is powered off.
|
---|
2854 | </para>
|
---|
2855 | </listitem>
|
---|
2856 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2857 |
|
---|
2858 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2859 | <term>
|
---|
2860 | <literal>GUI/HideFromManager</literal>
|
---|
2861 | </term>
|
---|
2862 |
|
---|
2863 | <listitem>
|
---|
2864 | <para>
|
---|
2865 | Hide a certain VM in the VM selector window.
|
---|
2866 | </para>
|
---|
2867 | </listitem>
|
---|
2868 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2869 |
|
---|
2870 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2871 | <term>
|
---|
2872 | <literal>GUI/PreventApplicationUpdate</literal>
|
---|
2873 | </term>
|
---|
2874 |
|
---|
2875 | <listitem>
|
---|
2876 | <para>
|
---|
2877 | Disable the automatic update check and hide the
|
---|
2878 | corresponding menu item.
|
---|
2879 | </para>
|
---|
2880 | </listitem>
|
---|
2881 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2882 |
|
---|
2883 | </variablelist>
|
---|
2884 |
|
---|
2885 | <para>
|
---|
2886 | Note that these settings do not prevent the user from
|
---|
2887 | reconfiguring the VM by using the <command>VBoxManage
|
---|
2888 | modifyvm</command> command.
|
---|
2889 | </para>
|
---|
2890 |
|
---|
2891 | </sect2>
|
---|
2892 |
|
---|
2893 | <sect2 id="config-vm-selector-menu">
|
---|
2894 |
|
---|
2895 | <title>Configure VM Selector Menu Entries</title>
|
---|
2896 |
|
---|
2897 | <para>
|
---|
2898 | You can disable certain entries in the global settings page of
|
---|
2899 | the VM selector:
|
---|
2900 | </para>
|
---|
2901 |
|
---|
2902 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/RestrictedGlobalSettingsPages <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable>...]</screen>
|
---|
2903 |
|
---|
2904 | <para>
|
---|
2905 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
2906 | </para>
|
---|
2907 |
|
---|
2908 | <variablelist>
|
---|
2909 |
|
---|
2910 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2911 | <term>
|
---|
2912 | <literal>General</literal>
|
---|
2913 | </term>
|
---|
2914 |
|
---|
2915 | <listitem>
|
---|
2916 | <para>
|
---|
2917 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">General</emphasis>
|
---|
2918 | settings pane.
|
---|
2919 | </para>
|
---|
2920 | </listitem>
|
---|
2921 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2922 |
|
---|
2923 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2924 | <term>
|
---|
2925 | <literal>Input</literal>
|
---|
2926 | </term>
|
---|
2927 |
|
---|
2928 | <listitem>
|
---|
2929 | <para>
|
---|
2930 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Input</emphasis>
|
---|
2931 | settings pane.
|
---|
2932 | </para>
|
---|
2933 | </listitem>
|
---|
2934 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2935 |
|
---|
2936 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2937 | <term>
|
---|
2938 | <literal>Update</literal>
|
---|
2939 | </term>
|
---|
2940 |
|
---|
2941 | <listitem>
|
---|
2942 | <para>
|
---|
2943 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Update</emphasis>
|
---|
2944 | settings pane.
|
---|
2945 | </para>
|
---|
2946 | </listitem>
|
---|
2947 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2948 |
|
---|
2949 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2950 | <term>
|
---|
2951 | <literal>Language</literal>
|
---|
2952 | </term>
|
---|
2953 |
|
---|
2954 | <listitem>
|
---|
2955 | <para>
|
---|
2956 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Language</emphasis>
|
---|
2957 | settings pane.
|
---|
2958 | </para>
|
---|
2959 | </listitem>
|
---|
2960 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2961 |
|
---|
2962 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2963 | <term>
|
---|
2964 | <literal>Display</literal>
|
---|
2965 | </term>
|
---|
2966 |
|
---|
2967 | <listitem>
|
---|
2968 | <para>
|
---|
2969 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Display</emphasis>
|
---|
2970 | settings pane.
|
---|
2971 | </para>
|
---|
2972 | </listitem>
|
---|
2973 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2974 |
|
---|
2975 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2976 | <term>
|
---|
2977 | <literal>Network</literal>
|
---|
2978 | </term>
|
---|
2979 |
|
---|
2980 | <listitem>
|
---|
2981 | <para>
|
---|
2982 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Network</emphasis>
|
---|
2983 | settings pane.
|
---|
2984 | </para>
|
---|
2985 | </listitem>
|
---|
2986 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2987 |
|
---|
2988 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2989 | <term>
|
---|
2990 | <literal>Extensions</literal>
|
---|
2991 | </term>
|
---|
2992 |
|
---|
2993 | <listitem>
|
---|
2994 | <para>
|
---|
2995 | Do not show the
|
---|
2996 | <emphasis role="bold">Extensions</emphasis> settings pane.
|
---|
2997 | </para>
|
---|
2998 | </listitem>
|
---|
2999 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3000 |
|
---|
3001 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3002 | <term>
|
---|
3003 | <literal>Proxy</literal>
|
---|
3004 | </term>
|
---|
3005 |
|
---|
3006 | <listitem>
|
---|
3007 | <para>
|
---|
3008 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Proxy</emphasis>
|
---|
3009 | settings pane.
|
---|
3010 | </para>
|
---|
3011 | </listitem>
|
---|
3012 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3013 |
|
---|
3014 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3015 |
|
---|
3016 | <para>
|
---|
3017 | This is a global setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
3018 | properties. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
3019 | command:
|
---|
3020 | </para>
|
---|
3021 |
|
---|
3022 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/RestrictedGlobalSettingsPages</screen>
|
---|
3023 |
|
---|
3024 | </sect2>
|
---|
3025 |
|
---|
3026 | <sect2 id="config-vm-window-menu">
|
---|
3027 |
|
---|
3028 | <title>Configure VM Window Menu Entries</title>
|
---|
3029 |
|
---|
3030 | <para>
|
---|
3031 | You can disable certain menu actions in the VM window:
|
---|
3032 | </para>
|
---|
3033 |
|
---|
3034 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMenus OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3035 |
|
---|
3036 | <para>
|
---|
3037 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3038 | keywords:
|
---|
3039 | </para>
|
---|
3040 |
|
---|
3041 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3042 |
|
---|
3043 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3044 | <term>
|
---|
3045 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3046 | </term>
|
---|
3047 |
|
---|
3048 | <listitem>
|
---|
3049 | <para>
|
---|
3050 | Do not show any menu in the VM window.
|
---|
3051 | </para>
|
---|
3052 | </listitem>
|
---|
3053 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3054 |
|
---|
3055 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3056 | <term>
|
---|
3057 | <literal>Application</literal>
|
---|
3058 | </term>
|
---|
3059 |
|
---|
3060 | <listitem>
|
---|
3061 | <para>
|
---|
3062 | Do not show
|
---|
3063 | <emphasis role="bold">Application/File</emphasis> menu in
|
---|
3064 | the VM window.
|
---|
3065 | </para>
|
---|
3066 | </listitem>
|
---|
3067 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3068 |
|
---|
3069 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3070 | <term>
|
---|
3071 | <literal>Machine</literal>
|
---|
3072 | </term>
|
---|
3073 |
|
---|
3074 | <listitem>
|
---|
3075 | <para>
|
---|
3076 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Machine</emphasis>
|
---|
3077 | menu in the VM window.
|
---|
3078 | </para>
|
---|
3079 | </listitem>
|
---|
3080 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3081 |
|
---|
3082 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3083 | <term>
|
---|
3084 | <literal>View</literal>
|
---|
3085 | </term>
|
---|
3086 |
|
---|
3087 | <listitem>
|
---|
3088 | <para>
|
---|
3089 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">View</emphasis> menu
|
---|
3090 | in the VM window.
|
---|
3091 | </para>
|
---|
3092 | </listitem>
|
---|
3093 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3094 |
|
---|
3095 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3096 | <term>
|
---|
3097 | <literal>Input</literal>
|
---|
3098 | </term>
|
---|
3099 |
|
---|
3100 | <listitem>
|
---|
3101 | <para>
|
---|
3102 | Do not show <emphasis role="bold">Input</emphasis> menu in
|
---|
3103 | the VM window.
|
---|
3104 | </para>
|
---|
3105 | </listitem>
|
---|
3106 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3107 |
|
---|
3108 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3109 | <term>
|
---|
3110 | <literal>Devices</literal>
|
---|
3111 | </term>
|
---|
3112 |
|
---|
3113 | <listitem>
|
---|
3114 | <para>
|
---|
3115 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Devices</emphasis>
|
---|
3116 | menu in the VM window.
|
---|
3117 | </para>
|
---|
3118 | </listitem>
|
---|
3119 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3120 |
|
---|
3121 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3122 | <term>
|
---|
3123 | <literal>Help</literal>
|
---|
3124 | </term>
|
---|
3125 |
|
---|
3126 | <listitem>
|
---|
3127 | <para>
|
---|
3128 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Help</emphasis> menu
|
---|
3129 | in the VM window.
|
---|
3130 | </para>
|
---|
3131 | </listitem>
|
---|
3132 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3133 |
|
---|
3134 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3135 | <term>
|
---|
3136 | <literal>Debug</literal>
|
---|
3137 | </term>
|
---|
3138 |
|
---|
3139 | <listitem>
|
---|
3140 | <para>
|
---|
3141 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Debug</emphasis>
|
---|
3142 | menu in the VM window. The Debug menu is only visible if
|
---|
3143 | the GUI was started with special command line parameters
|
---|
3144 | or environment variable settings.
|
---|
3145 | </para>
|
---|
3146 | </listitem>
|
---|
3147 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3148 |
|
---|
3149 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3150 |
|
---|
3151 | <para>
|
---|
3152 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3153 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
3154 | command:
|
---|
3155 | </para>
|
---|
3156 |
|
---|
3157 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMenus</screen>
|
---|
3158 |
|
---|
3159 | <para>
|
---|
3160 | You can also disable certain menu actions of certain menus. Use
|
---|
3161 | the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3162 | <emphasis role="bold">Application</emphasis> menu. This is only
|
---|
3163 | available on Mac OS X hosts.
|
---|
3164 | </para>
|
---|
3165 |
|
---|
3166 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeApplicationMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3167 |
|
---|
3168 | <para>
|
---|
3169 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3170 | keywords:
|
---|
3171 | </para>
|
---|
3172 |
|
---|
3173 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3174 |
|
---|
3175 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3176 | <term>
|
---|
3177 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3178 | </term>
|
---|
3179 |
|
---|
3180 | <listitem>
|
---|
3181 | <para>
|
---|
3182 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3183 | </para>
|
---|
3184 | </listitem>
|
---|
3185 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3186 |
|
---|
3187 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3188 | <term>
|
---|
3189 | <literal>About</literal>
|
---|
3190 | </term>
|
---|
3191 |
|
---|
3192 | <listitem>
|
---|
3193 | <para>
|
---|
3194 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">About</emphasis>
|
---|
3195 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3196 | </para>
|
---|
3197 | </listitem>
|
---|
3198 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3199 |
|
---|
3200 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3201 | <term>
|
---|
3202 | <literal>Preferences</literal>
|
---|
3203 | </term>
|
---|
3204 |
|
---|
3205 | <listitem>
|
---|
3206 | <para>
|
---|
3207 | Do not show the
|
---|
3208 | <emphasis role="bold">Preferences</emphasis> menu item in
|
---|
3209 | this menu.
|
---|
3210 | </para>
|
---|
3211 | </listitem>
|
---|
3212 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3213 |
|
---|
3214 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3215 | <term>
|
---|
3216 | <literal>NetworkAccessManager</literal>
|
---|
3217 | </term>
|
---|
3218 |
|
---|
3219 | <listitem>
|
---|
3220 | <para>
|
---|
3221 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Network Operations
|
---|
3222 | Manager</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3223 | </para>
|
---|
3224 | </listitem>
|
---|
3225 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3226 |
|
---|
3227 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3228 | <term>
|
---|
3229 | <literal>ResetWarnings</literal>
|
---|
3230 | </term>
|
---|
3231 |
|
---|
3232 | <listitem>
|
---|
3233 | <para>
|
---|
3234 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Reset All
|
---|
3235 | Warnings</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3236 | </para>
|
---|
3237 | </listitem>
|
---|
3238 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3239 |
|
---|
3240 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3241 | <term>
|
---|
3242 | <literal>Close</literal>
|
---|
3243 | </term>
|
---|
3244 |
|
---|
3245 | <listitem>
|
---|
3246 | <para>
|
---|
3247 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Close</emphasis>
|
---|
3248 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3249 | </para>
|
---|
3250 | </listitem>
|
---|
3251 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3252 |
|
---|
3253 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3254 |
|
---|
3255 | <para>
|
---|
3256 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3257 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
3258 | command:
|
---|
3259 | </para>
|
---|
3260 |
|
---|
3261 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMenus</screen>
|
---|
3262 |
|
---|
3263 | <para>
|
---|
3264 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3265 | <emphasis role="bold">Machine</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3266 | </para>
|
---|
3267 |
|
---|
3268 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMachineMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3269 |
|
---|
3270 | <para>
|
---|
3271 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3272 | keywords:
|
---|
3273 | </para>
|
---|
3274 |
|
---|
3275 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3276 |
|
---|
3277 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3278 | <term>
|
---|
3279 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3280 | </term>
|
---|
3281 |
|
---|
3282 | <listitem>
|
---|
3283 | <para>
|
---|
3284 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3285 | </para>
|
---|
3286 | </listitem>
|
---|
3287 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3288 |
|
---|
3289 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3290 | <term>
|
---|
3291 | <literal>SettingsDialog</literal>
|
---|
3292 | </term>
|
---|
3293 |
|
---|
3294 | <listitem>
|
---|
3295 | <para>
|
---|
3296 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Settings</emphasis>
|
---|
3297 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3298 | </para>
|
---|
3299 | </listitem>
|
---|
3300 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3301 |
|
---|
3302 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3303 | <term>
|
---|
3304 | <literal>TakeSnapshot</literal>
|
---|
3305 | </term>
|
---|
3306 |
|
---|
3307 | <listitem>
|
---|
3308 | <para>
|
---|
3309 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Take
|
---|
3310 | Snapshot...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3311 | </para>
|
---|
3312 | </listitem>
|
---|
3313 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3314 |
|
---|
3315 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3316 | <term>
|
---|
3317 | <literal>InformationDialog</literal>
|
---|
3318 | </term>
|
---|
3319 |
|
---|
3320 | <listitem>
|
---|
3321 | <para>
|
---|
3322 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Session
|
---|
3323 | Information...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3324 | </para>
|
---|
3325 | </listitem>
|
---|
3326 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3327 |
|
---|
3328 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3329 | <term>
|
---|
3330 | <literal>FileManagerDialog</literal>
|
---|
3331 | </term>
|
---|
3332 |
|
---|
3333 | <listitem>
|
---|
3334 | <para>
|
---|
3335 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">File
|
---|
3336 | Manager...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3337 | </para>
|
---|
3338 | </listitem>
|
---|
3339 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3340 |
|
---|
3341 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3342 | <term>
|
---|
3343 | <literal>Pause</literal>
|
---|
3344 | </term>
|
---|
3345 |
|
---|
3346 | <listitem>
|
---|
3347 | <para>
|
---|
3348 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Pause</emphasis>
|
---|
3349 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3350 | </para>
|
---|
3351 | </listitem>
|
---|
3352 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3353 |
|
---|
3354 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3355 | <term>
|
---|
3356 | <literal>Reset</literal>
|
---|
3357 | </term>
|
---|
3358 |
|
---|
3359 | <listitem>
|
---|
3360 | <para>
|
---|
3361 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Reset</emphasis>
|
---|
3362 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3363 | </para>
|
---|
3364 | </listitem>
|
---|
3365 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3366 |
|
---|
3367 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3368 | <term>
|
---|
3369 | <literal>Shutdown</literal>
|
---|
3370 | </term>
|
---|
3371 |
|
---|
3372 | <listitem>
|
---|
3373 | <para>
|
---|
3374 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">ACPI
|
---|
3375 | Shutdown</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3376 | </para>
|
---|
3377 | </listitem>
|
---|
3378 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3379 |
|
---|
3380 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3381 |
|
---|
3382 | <para>
|
---|
3383 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3384 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
3385 | </para>
|
---|
3386 |
|
---|
3387 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMachineMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
3388 |
|
---|
3389 | <para>
|
---|
3390 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3391 | <emphasis role="bold">View</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3392 | </para>
|
---|
3393 |
|
---|
3394 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeViewMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3395 |
|
---|
3396 | <para>
|
---|
3397 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3398 | keywords:
|
---|
3399 | </para>
|
---|
3400 |
|
---|
3401 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3402 |
|
---|
3403 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3404 | <term>
|
---|
3405 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3406 | </term>
|
---|
3407 |
|
---|
3408 | <listitem>
|
---|
3409 | <para>
|
---|
3410 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3411 | </para>
|
---|
3412 | </listitem>
|
---|
3413 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3414 |
|
---|
3415 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3416 | <term>
|
---|
3417 | <literal>Fullscreen</literal>
|
---|
3418 | </term>
|
---|
3419 |
|
---|
3420 | <listitem>
|
---|
3421 | <para>
|
---|
3422 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Full-screen
|
---|
3423 | Mode</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3424 | </para>
|
---|
3425 | </listitem>
|
---|
3426 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3427 |
|
---|
3428 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3429 | <term>
|
---|
3430 | <literal>Seamless</literal>
|
---|
3431 | </term>
|
---|
3432 |
|
---|
3433 | <listitem>
|
---|
3434 | <para>
|
---|
3435 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Seamless
|
---|
3436 | Mode</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3437 | </para>
|
---|
3438 | </listitem>
|
---|
3439 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3440 |
|
---|
3441 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3442 | <term>
|
---|
3443 | <literal>Scale</literal>
|
---|
3444 | </term>
|
---|
3445 |
|
---|
3446 | <listitem>
|
---|
3447 | <para>
|
---|
3448 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Scaled
|
---|
3449 | Mode</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3450 | </para>
|
---|
3451 | </listitem>
|
---|
3452 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3453 |
|
---|
3454 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3455 | <term>
|
---|
3456 | <literal>GuestAutoresize</literal>
|
---|
3457 | </term>
|
---|
3458 |
|
---|
3459 | <listitem>
|
---|
3460 | <para>
|
---|
3461 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Auto-resize Guest
|
---|
3462 | Display</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3463 | </para>
|
---|
3464 | </listitem>
|
---|
3465 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3466 |
|
---|
3467 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3468 | <term>
|
---|
3469 | <literal>AdjustWindow</literal>
|
---|
3470 | </term>
|
---|
3471 |
|
---|
3472 | <listitem>
|
---|
3473 | <para>
|
---|
3474 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Adjust Window
|
---|
3475 | Size</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3476 | </para>
|
---|
3477 | </listitem>
|
---|
3478 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3479 |
|
---|
3480 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3481 | <term>
|
---|
3482 | <literal>TakeScreenshot</literal>
|
---|
3483 | </term>
|
---|
3484 |
|
---|
3485 | <listitem>
|
---|
3486 | <para>
|
---|
3487 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Take
|
---|
3488 | Screenshot...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3489 | </para>
|
---|
3490 | </listitem>
|
---|
3491 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3492 |
|
---|
3493 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3494 | <term>
|
---|
3495 | <literal>Recording</literal>
|
---|
3496 | </term>
|
---|
3497 |
|
---|
3498 | <listitem>
|
---|
3499 | <para>
|
---|
3500 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Recording</emphasis>
|
---|
3501 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3502 | </para>
|
---|
3503 | </listitem>
|
---|
3504 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3505 |
|
---|
3506 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3507 | <term>
|
---|
3508 | <literal>VRDEServer</literal>
|
---|
3509 | </term>
|
---|
3510 |
|
---|
3511 | <listitem>
|
---|
3512 | <para>
|
---|
3513 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Remote
|
---|
3514 | Display</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3515 | </para>
|
---|
3516 | </listitem>
|
---|
3517 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3518 |
|
---|
3519 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3520 | <term>
|
---|
3521 | <literal>MenuBar</literal>
|
---|
3522 | </term>
|
---|
3523 |
|
---|
3524 | <listitem>
|
---|
3525 | <para>
|
---|
3526 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Menu Bar</emphasis>
|
---|
3527 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3528 | </para>
|
---|
3529 | </listitem>
|
---|
3530 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3531 |
|
---|
3532 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3533 | <term>
|
---|
3534 | <literal>MenuBarSettings</literal>
|
---|
3535 | </term>
|
---|
3536 |
|
---|
3537 | <listitem>
|
---|
3538 | <para>
|
---|
3539 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Menu Bar
|
---|
3540 | Settings...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3541 | </para>
|
---|
3542 | </listitem>
|
---|
3543 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3544 |
|
---|
3545 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3546 | <term>
|
---|
3547 | <literal>StatusBar</literal>
|
---|
3548 | </term>
|
---|
3549 |
|
---|
3550 | <listitem>
|
---|
3551 | <para>
|
---|
3552 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Status
|
---|
3553 | Bar</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3554 | </para>
|
---|
3555 | </listitem>
|
---|
3556 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3557 |
|
---|
3558 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3559 | <term>
|
---|
3560 | <literal>StatusbarSettings</literal>
|
---|
3561 | </term>
|
---|
3562 |
|
---|
3563 | <listitem>
|
---|
3564 | <para>
|
---|
3565 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Statusbar
|
---|
3566 | Settings...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3567 | </para>
|
---|
3568 | </listitem>
|
---|
3569 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3570 |
|
---|
3571 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3572 |
|
---|
3573 | <para>
|
---|
3574 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3575 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
3576 | </para>
|
---|
3577 |
|
---|
3578 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeViewMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
3579 |
|
---|
3580 | <para>
|
---|
3581 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3582 | <emphasis role="bold">Input</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3583 | </para>
|
---|
3584 |
|
---|
3585 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeInputMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3586 |
|
---|
3587 | <para>
|
---|
3588 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3589 | keywords:
|
---|
3590 | </para>
|
---|
3591 |
|
---|
3592 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3593 |
|
---|
3594 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3595 | <term>
|
---|
3596 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3597 | </term>
|
---|
3598 |
|
---|
3599 | <listitem>
|
---|
3600 | <para>
|
---|
3601 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3602 | </para>
|
---|
3603 | </listitem>
|
---|
3604 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3605 |
|
---|
3606 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3607 | <term>
|
---|
3608 | <literal>Keyboard</literal>
|
---|
3609 | </term>
|
---|
3610 |
|
---|
3611 | <listitem>
|
---|
3612 | <para>
|
---|
3613 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Keyboard</emphasis>
|
---|
3614 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3615 | </para>
|
---|
3616 | </listitem>
|
---|
3617 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3618 |
|
---|
3619 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3620 | <term>
|
---|
3621 | <literal>KeyboardSettings</literal>
|
---|
3622 | </term>
|
---|
3623 |
|
---|
3624 | <listitem>
|
---|
3625 | <para>
|
---|
3626 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Keyboard
|
---|
3627 | Settings...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3628 | </para>
|
---|
3629 | </listitem>
|
---|
3630 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3631 |
|
---|
3632 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3633 | <term>
|
---|
3634 | <literal>SoftKeyboard</literal>
|
---|
3635 | </term>
|
---|
3636 |
|
---|
3637 | <listitem>
|
---|
3638 | <para>
|
---|
3639 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Soft
|
---|
3640 | Keyboard...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3641 | </para>
|
---|
3642 | </listitem>
|
---|
3643 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3644 |
|
---|
3645 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3646 | <term>
|
---|
3647 | <literal>TypeCAD</literal>
|
---|
3648 | </term>
|
---|
3649 |
|
---|
3650 | <listitem>
|
---|
3651 | <para>
|
---|
3652 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert
|
---|
3653 | Ctrl-Alt-Del</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3654 | </para>
|
---|
3655 | </listitem>
|
---|
3656 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3657 |
|
---|
3658 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3659 | <term>
|
---|
3660 | <literal>TypeCABS</literal>
|
---|
3661 | </term>
|
---|
3662 |
|
---|
3663 | <listitem>
|
---|
3664 | <para>
|
---|
3665 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert
|
---|
3666 | Ctrl-Alt-Backspace</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3667 | </para>
|
---|
3668 | </listitem>
|
---|
3669 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3670 |
|
---|
3671 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3672 | <term>
|
---|
3673 | <literal>TypeCtrlBreak</literal>
|
---|
3674 | </term>
|
---|
3675 |
|
---|
3676 | <listitem>
|
---|
3677 | <para>
|
---|
3678 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert
|
---|
3679 | Ctrl-Break</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3680 | </para>
|
---|
3681 | </listitem>
|
---|
3682 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3683 |
|
---|
3684 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3685 | <term>
|
---|
3686 | <literal>TypeInsert</literal>
|
---|
3687 | </term>
|
---|
3688 |
|
---|
3689 | <listitem>
|
---|
3690 | <para>
|
---|
3691 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert
|
---|
3692 | Insert</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3693 | </para>
|
---|
3694 | </listitem>
|
---|
3695 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3696 |
|
---|
3697 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3698 | <term>
|
---|
3699 | <literal>TypePrintScreen</literal>
|
---|
3700 | </term>
|
---|
3701 |
|
---|
3702 | <listitem>
|
---|
3703 | <para>
|
---|
3704 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert Print
|
---|
3705 | Screen</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3706 | </para>
|
---|
3707 | </listitem>
|
---|
3708 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3709 |
|
---|
3710 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3711 | <term>
|
---|
3712 | <literal>TypeAltPrintScreen</literal>
|
---|
3713 | </term>
|
---|
3714 |
|
---|
3715 | <listitem>
|
---|
3716 | <para>
|
---|
3717 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert Alt Print
|
---|
3718 | Screen</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3719 | </para>
|
---|
3720 | </listitem>
|
---|
3721 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3722 |
|
---|
3723 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3724 | <term>
|
---|
3725 | <literal>TypeHostKeyCombo</literal>
|
---|
3726 | </term>
|
---|
3727 |
|
---|
3728 | <listitem>
|
---|
3729 | <para>
|
---|
3730 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert Host Key
|
---|
3731 | Combo</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3732 | </para>
|
---|
3733 | </listitem>
|
---|
3734 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3735 |
|
---|
3736 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3737 | <term>
|
---|
3738 | <literal>MouseIntegration</literal>
|
---|
3739 | </term>
|
---|
3740 |
|
---|
3741 | <listitem>
|
---|
3742 | <para>
|
---|
3743 | Do not show the
|
---|
3744 | <emphasis role="bold">MouseIntegration</emphasis> menu
|
---|
3745 | item in this menu.
|
---|
3746 | </para>
|
---|
3747 | </listitem>
|
---|
3748 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3749 |
|
---|
3750 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3751 |
|
---|
3752 | <para>
|
---|
3753 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3754 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
3755 | </para>
|
---|
3756 |
|
---|
3757 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeInputMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
3758 |
|
---|
3759 | <para>
|
---|
3760 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3761 | <emphasis role="bold">Devices</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3762 | </para>
|
---|
3763 |
|
---|
3764 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeDevicesMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3765 |
|
---|
3766 | <para>
|
---|
3767 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following keywords
|
---|
3768 | to disable actions in the
|
---|
3769 | <emphasis role="bold">Devices</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3770 | </para>
|
---|
3771 |
|
---|
3772 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3773 |
|
---|
3774 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3775 | <term>
|
---|
3776 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3777 | </term>
|
---|
3778 |
|
---|
3779 | <listitem>
|
---|
3780 | <para>
|
---|
3781 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3782 | </para>
|
---|
3783 | </listitem>
|
---|
3784 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3785 |
|
---|
3786 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3787 | <term>
|
---|
3788 | <literal>HardDrives</literal>
|
---|
3789 | </term>
|
---|
3790 |
|
---|
3791 | <listitem>
|
---|
3792 | <para>
|
---|
3793 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Hard
|
---|
3794 | Disks</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3795 | </para>
|
---|
3796 | </listitem>
|
---|
3797 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3798 |
|
---|
3799 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3800 | <term>
|
---|
3801 | <literal>OpticalDevices</literal>
|
---|
3802 | </term>
|
---|
3803 |
|
---|
3804 | <listitem>
|
---|
3805 | <para>
|
---|
3806 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Optical
|
---|
3807 | Devices</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3808 | </para>
|
---|
3809 | </listitem>
|
---|
3810 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3811 |
|
---|
3812 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3813 | <term>
|
---|
3814 | <literal>FloppyDevices</literal>
|
---|
3815 | </term>
|
---|
3816 |
|
---|
3817 | <listitem>
|
---|
3818 | <para>
|
---|
3819 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Floppy
|
---|
3820 | Drives</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3821 | </para>
|
---|
3822 | </listitem>
|
---|
3823 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3824 |
|
---|
3825 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3826 | <term>
|
---|
3827 | <literal>Audio</literal>
|
---|
3828 | </term>
|
---|
3829 |
|
---|
3830 | <listitem>
|
---|
3831 | <para>
|
---|
3832 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Audio</emphasis>
|
---|
3833 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3834 | </para>
|
---|
3835 | </listitem>
|
---|
3836 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3837 |
|
---|
3838 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3839 | <term>
|
---|
3840 | <literal>Network</literal>
|
---|
3841 | </term>
|
---|
3842 |
|
---|
3843 | <listitem>
|
---|
3844 | <para>
|
---|
3845 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Network</emphasis>
|
---|
3846 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3847 | </para>
|
---|
3848 | </listitem>
|
---|
3849 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3850 |
|
---|
3851 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3852 | <term>
|
---|
3853 | <literal>NetworkSettings</literal>
|
---|
3854 | </term>
|
---|
3855 |
|
---|
3856 | <listitem>
|
---|
3857 | <para>
|
---|
3858 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Network
|
---|
3859 | Settings</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3860 | </para>
|
---|
3861 | </listitem>
|
---|
3862 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3863 |
|
---|
3864 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3865 | <term>
|
---|
3866 | <literal>USBDevices</literal>
|
---|
3867 | </term>
|
---|
3868 |
|
---|
3869 | <listitem>
|
---|
3870 | <para>
|
---|
3871 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">USB </emphasis> menu
|
---|
3872 | item in this menu.
|
---|
3873 | </para>
|
---|
3874 | </listitem>
|
---|
3875 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3876 |
|
---|
3877 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3878 | <term>
|
---|
3879 | <literal>WebCams</literal>
|
---|
3880 | </term>
|
---|
3881 |
|
---|
3882 | <listitem>
|
---|
3883 | <para>
|
---|
3884 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">WebCams </emphasis>
|
---|
3885 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3886 | </para>
|
---|
3887 | </listitem>
|
---|
3888 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3889 |
|
---|
3890 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3891 | <term>
|
---|
3892 | <literal>SharedFolders</literal>
|
---|
3893 | </term>
|
---|
3894 |
|
---|
3895 | <listitem>
|
---|
3896 | <para>
|
---|
3897 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Shared
|
---|
3898 | Folders</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3899 | </para>
|
---|
3900 | </listitem>
|
---|
3901 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3902 |
|
---|
3903 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3904 | <term>
|
---|
3905 | <literal>SharedFoldersSettings</literal>
|
---|
3906 | </term>
|
---|
3907 |
|
---|
3908 | <listitem>
|
---|
3909 | <para>
|
---|
3910 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Shared Folders
|
---|
3911 | Settings...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3912 | </para>
|
---|
3913 | </listitem>
|
---|
3914 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3915 |
|
---|
3916 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3917 | <term>
|
---|
3918 | <literal>SharedClipboard</literal>
|
---|
3919 | </term>
|
---|
3920 |
|
---|
3921 | <listitem>
|
---|
3922 | <para>
|
---|
3923 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Shared
|
---|
3924 | Clipboard</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3925 | </para>
|
---|
3926 | </listitem>
|
---|
3927 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3928 |
|
---|
3929 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3930 | <term>
|
---|
3931 | <literal>DragAndDrop</literal>
|
---|
3932 | </term>
|
---|
3933 |
|
---|
3934 | <listitem>
|
---|
3935 | <para>
|
---|
3936 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Drag and
|
---|
3937 | Drop</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3938 | </para>
|
---|
3939 | </listitem>
|
---|
3940 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3941 |
|
---|
3942 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3943 | <term>
|
---|
3944 | <literal>InstallGuestTools</literal>
|
---|
3945 | </term>
|
---|
3946 |
|
---|
3947 | <listitem>
|
---|
3948 | <para>
|
---|
3949 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert Guest
|
---|
3950 | Additions CD image...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3951 | </para>
|
---|
3952 | </listitem>
|
---|
3953 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3954 |
|
---|
3955 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3956 |
|
---|
3957 | <para>
|
---|
3958 | This is a per-VM or global or global setting. Any combination of
|
---|
3959 | the above is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
3960 | </para>
|
---|
3961 |
|
---|
3962 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeDevicesMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
3963 |
|
---|
3964 | <para>
|
---|
3965 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3966 | <emphasis role="bold">Debug</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3967 | </para>
|
---|
3968 |
|
---|
3969 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeDebuggerMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3970 |
|
---|
3971 | <para>
|
---|
3972 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following keywords
|
---|
3973 | to disable actions in the <emphasis>Debug</emphasis> menu, which
|
---|
3974 | is normally completely disabled:
|
---|
3975 | </para>
|
---|
3976 |
|
---|
3977 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3978 |
|
---|
3979 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3980 | <term>
|
---|
3981 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3982 | </term>
|
---|
3983 |
|
---|
3984 | <listitem>
|
---|
3985 | <para>
|
---|
3986 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3987 | </para>
|
---|
3988 | </listitem>
|
---|
3989 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3990 |
|
---|
3991 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3992 | <term>
|
---|
3993 | <literal>Statistics</literal>
|
---|
3994 | </term>
|
---|
3995 |
|
---|
3996 | <listitem>
|
---|
3997 | <para>
|
---|
3998 | Do not show the
|
---|
3999 | <emphasis role="bold">Statistics...</emphasis> menu item
|
---|
4000 | in this menu.
|
---|
4001 | </para>
|
---|
4002 | </listitem>
|
---|
4003 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4004 |
|
---|
4005 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4006 | <term>
|
---|
4007 | <literal>CommandLine</literal>
|
---|
4008 | </term>
|
---|
4009 |
|
---|
4010 | <listitem>
|
---|
4011 | <para>
|
---|
4012 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Command
|
---|
4013 | Line...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4014 | </para>
|
---|
4015 | </listitem>
|
---|
4016 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4017 |
|
---|
4018 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4019 | <term>
|
---|
4020 | <literal>Logging</literal>
|
---|
4021 | </term>
|
---|
4022 |
|
---|
4023 | <listitem>
|
---|
4024 | <para>
|
---|
4025 | Do not show the
|
---|
4026 | <emphasis role="bold">Logging...</emphasis> menu item in
|
---|
4027 | this menu.
|
---|
4028 | </para>
|
---|
4029 | </listitem>
|
---|
4030 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4031 |
|
---|
4032 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4033 | <term>
|
---|
4034 | <literal>LogDialog</literal>
|
---|
4035 | </term>
|
---|
4036 |
|
---|
4037 | <listitem>
|
---|
4038 | <para>
|
---|
4039 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Show
|
---|
4040 | Log...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4041 | </para>
|
---|
4042 | </listitem>
|
---|
4043 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4044 |
|
---|
4045 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4046 | <term>
|
---|
4047 | <literal>GuestControlConsole</literal>
|
---|
4048 | </term>
|
---|
4049 |
|
---|
4050 | <listitem>
|
---|
4051 | <para>
|
---|
4052 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Guest Control
|
---|
4053 | Terminal...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4054 | </para>
|
---|
4055 | </listitem>
|
---|
4056 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4057 |
|
---|
4058 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4059 |
|
---|
4060 | <para>
|
---|
4061 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
4062 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
4063 | </para>
|
---|
4064 |
|
---|
4065 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeDebuggerMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
4066 |
|
---|
4067 | <para>
|
---|
4068 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
4069 | <emphasis role="bold">View</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
4070 | </para>
|
---|
4071 |
|
---|
4072 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeHelpMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
4073 |
|
---|
4074 | <para>
|
---|
4075 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following keywords
|
---|
4076 | to disable actions in the <emphasis role="bold">Help</emphasis>
|
---|
4077 | menu, which is normally completely disabled:
|
---|
4078 | </para>
|
---|
4079 |
|
---|
4080 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4081 |
|
---|
4082 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4083 | <term>
|
---|
4084 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
4085 | </term>
|
---|
4086 |
|
---|
4087 | <listitem>
|
---|
4088 | <para>
|
---|
4089 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4090 | </para>
|
---|
4091 | </listitem>
|
---|
4092 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4093 |
|
---|
4094 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4095 | <term>
|
---|
4096 | <literal>Contents</literal>
|
---|
4097 | </term>
|
---|
4098 |
|
---|
4099 | <listitem>
|
---|
4100 | <para>
|
---|
4101 | Do not show the
|
---|
4102 | <emphasis role="bold">Contents...</emphasis> menu item in
|
---|
4103 | this menu.
|
---|
4104 | </para>
|
---|
4105 | </listitem>
|
---|
4106 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4107 |
|
---|
4108 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4109 | <term>
|
---|
4110 | <literal>WebSite</literal>
|
---|
4111 | </term>
|
---|
4112 |
|
---|
4113 | <listitem>
|
---|
4114 | <para>
|
---|
4115 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">VirtualBox Web
|
---|
4116 | Site...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4117 | </para>
|
---|
4118 | </listitem>
|
---|
4119 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4120 |
|
---|
4121 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4122 | <term>
|
---|
4123 | <literal>BugTracker</literal>
|
---|
4124 | </term>
|
---|
4125 |
|
---|
4126 | <listitem>
|
---|
4127 | <para>
|
---|
4128 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">VirtualBox Bug
|
---|
4129 | Tracker...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4130 | </para>
|
---|
4131 | </listitem>
|
---|
4132 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4133 |
|
---|
4134 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4135 | <term>
|
---|
4136 | <literal>Forums</literal>
|
---|
4137 | </term>
|
---|
4138 |
|
---|
4139 | <listitem>
|
---|
4140 | <para>
|
---|
4141 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">VirtualBox
|
---|
4142 | Forums...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4143 | </para>
|
---|
4144 | </listitem>
|
---|
4145 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4146 |
|
---|
4147 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4148 | <term>
|
---|
4149 | <literal>Oracle</literal>
|
---|
4150 | </term>
|
---|
4151 |
|
---|
4152 | <listitem>
|
---|
4153 | <para>
|
---|
4154 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Oracle Web
|
---|
4155 | Site...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4156 | </para>
|
---|
4157 | </listitem>
|
---|
4158 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4159 |
|
---|
4160 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4161 | <term>
|
---|
4162 | <literal>About</literal>
|
---|
4163 | </term>
|
---|
4164 |
|
---|
4165 | <listitem>
|
---|
4166 | <para>
|
---|
4167 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">About
|
---|
4168 | VirtualBox...</emphasis> menu item in this menu. Only for
|
---|
4169 | non-Mac OS X hosts.
|
---|
4170 | </para>
|
---|
4171 | </listitem>
|
---|
4172 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4173 |
|
---|
4174 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4175 |
|
---|
4176 | <para>
|
---|
4177 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
4178 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
4179 | </para>
|
---|
4180 |
|
---|
4181 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeHelpMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
4182 |
|
---|
4183 | </sect2>
|
---|
4184 |
|
---|
4185 | <sect2 id="config-vm-window-status-bar">
|
---|
4186 |
|
---|
4187 | <title>Configure VM Window Status Bar Entries</title>
|
---|
4188 |
|
---|
4189 | <para>
|
---|
4190 | You can disable certain status bar items:
|
---|
4191 | </para>
|
---|
4192 |
|
---|
4193 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedStatusBarIndicators OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
4194 |
|
---|
4195 | <para>
|
---|
4196 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
4197 | keywords:
|
---|
4198 | </para>
|
---|
4199 |
|
---|
4200 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4201 |
|
---|
4202 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4203 | <term>
|
---|
4204 | <literal>HardDisks</literal>
|
---|
4205 | </term>
|
---|
4206 |
|
---|
4207 | <listitem>
|
---|
4208 | <para>
|
---|
4209 | Do not show the hard disk icon in the VM window status
|
---|
4210 | bar. By default the hard disk icon is only shown if the VM
|
---|
4211 | configuration contains one or more hard disks.
|
---|
4212 | </para>
|
---|
4213 | </listitem>
|
---|
4214 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4215 |
|
---|
4216 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4217 | <term>
|
---|
4218 | <literal>OpticalDisks</literal>
|
---|
4219 | </term>
|
---|
4220 |
|
---|
4221 | <listitem>
|
---|
4222 | <para>
|
---|
4223 | Do not show the CD icon in the VM window status bar. By
|
---|
4224 | default the CD icon is only shown if the VM configuration
|
---|
4225 | contains one or more CD drives.
|
---|
4226 | </para>
|
---|
4227 | </listitem>
|
---|
4228 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4229 |
|
---|
4230 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4231 | <term>
|
---|
4232 | <literal>FloppyDisks</literal>
|
---|
4233 | </term>
|
---|
4234 |
|
---|
4235 | <listitem>
|
---|
4236 | <para>
|
---|
4237 | Do not show the floppy icon in the VM window status bar.
|
---|
4238 | By default the floppy icon is only shown if the VM
|
---|
4239 | configuration contains one or more floppy drives.
|
---|
4240 | </para>
|
---|
4241 | </listitem>
|
---|
4242 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4243 |
|
---|
4244 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4245 | <term>
|
---|
4246 | <literal>Network</literal>
|
---|
4247 | </term>
|
---|
4248 |
|
---|
4249 | <listitem>
|
---|
4250 | <para>
|
---|
4251 | Do not show the network icon in the VM window status bar.
|
---|
4252 | By default the network icon is only shown if the VM
|
---|
4253 | configuration contains one or more active network
|
---|
4254 | adapters.
|
---|
4255 | </para>
|
---|
4256 | </listitem>
|
---|
4257 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4258 |
|
---|
4259 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4260 | <term>
|
---|
4261 | <literal>USB</literal>
|
---|
4262 | </term>
|
---|
4263 |
|
---|
4264 | <listitem>
|
---|
4265 | <para>
|
---|
4266 | Do not show the USB icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4267 | </para>
|
---|
4268 | </listitem>
|
---|
4269 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4270 |
|
---|
4271 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4272 | <term>
|
---|
4273 | <literal>SharedFolders</literal>
|
---|
4274 | </term>
|
---|
4275 |
|
---|
4276 | <listitem>
|
---|
4277 | <para>
|
---|
4278 | Do not show the shared folders icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4279 | </para>
|
---|
4280 | </listitem>
|
---|
4281 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4282 |
|
---|
4283 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4284 | <term>
|
---|
4285 | <literal>Capture</literal>
|
---|
4286 | </term>
|
---|
4287 |
|
---|
4288 | <listitem>
|
---|
4289 | <para>
|
---|
4290 | Do not show the capture icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4291 | </para>
|
---|
4292 | </listitem>
|
---|
4293 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4294 |
|
---|
4295 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4296 | <term>
|
---|
4297 | <literal>Features</literal>
|
---|
4298 | </term>
|
---|
4299 |
|
---|
4300 | <listitem>
|
---|
4301 | <para>
|
---|
4302 | Do not show the CPU features icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4303 | </para>
|
---|
4304 | </listitem>
|
---|
4305 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4306 |
|
---|
4307 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4308 | <term>
|
---|
4309 | <literal>Mouse</literal>
|
---|
4310 | </term>
|
---|
4311 |
|
---|
4312 | <listitem>
|
---|
4313 | <para>
|
---|
4314 | Do not show the mouse icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4315 | </para>
|
---|
4316 | </listitem>
|
---|
4317 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4318 |
|
---|
4319 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4320 | <term>
|
---|
4321 | <literal>Keyboard</literal>
|
---|
4322 | </term>
|
---|
4323 |
|
---|
4324 | <listitem>
|
---|
4325 | <para>
|
---|
4326 | Do not show the keyboard icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4327 | </para>
|
---|
4328 | </listitem>
|
---|
4329 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4330 |
|
---|
4331 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4332 |
|
---|
4333 | <para>
|
---|
4334 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
4335 | is allowed. If all options are specified, no icons are displayed
|
---|
4336 | in the status bar of the VM window. To restore the default
|
---|
4337 | behavior, use
|
---|
4338 | </para>
|
---|
4339 |
|
---|
4340 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedStatusBarIndicators</screen>
|
---|
4341 |
|
---|
4342 | </sect2>
|
---|
4343 |
|
---|
4344 | <sect2 id="config-vm-window-visual-modes">
|
---|
4345 |
|
---|
4346 | <title>Configure VM Window Visual Modes</title>
|
---|
4347 |
|
---|
4348 | <para>
|
---|
4349 | You can disable certain VM visual modes:
|
---|
4350 | </para>
|
---|
4351 |
|
---|
4352 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/RestrictedVisualStates <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable>...]</screen>
|
---|
4353 |
|
---|
4354 | <para>
|
---|
4355 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4356 | </para>
|
---|
4357 |
|
---|
4358 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4359 |
|
---|
4360 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4361 | <term>
|
---|
4362 | <literal>Fullscreen</literal>
|
---|
4363 | </term>
|
---|
4364 |
|
---|
4365 | <listitem>
|
---|
4366 | <para>
|
---|
4367 | Do not allow to switch the VM into full screen mode.
|
---|
4368 | </para>
|
---|
4369 | </listitem>
|
---|
4370 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4371 |
|
---|
4372 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4373 | <term>
|
---|
4374 | <literal>Seamless</literal>
|
---|
4375 | </term>
|
---|
4376 |
|
---|
4377 | <listitem>
|
---|
4378 | <para>
|
---|
4379 | Do not allow to switch the VM into seamless mode.
|
---|
4380 | </para>
|
---|
4381 | </listitem>
|
---|
4382 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4383 |
|
---|
4384 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4385 | <term>
|
---|
4386 | <literal>Scale</literal>
|
---|
4387 | </term>
|
---|
4388 |
|
---|
4389 | <listitem>
|
---|
4390 | <para>
|
---|
4391 | Do not allow to switch the VM into scale mode.
|
---|
4392 | </para>
|
---|
4393 | </listitem>
|
---|
4394 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4395 |
|
---|
4396 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4397 |
|
---|
4398 | <para>
|
---|
4399 | This is a per-VM setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
4400 | properties. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
4401 | command:
|
---|
4402 | </para>
|
---|
4403 |
|
---|
4404 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/RestrictedVisualStates</screen>
|
---|
4405 |
|
---|
4406 | </sect2>
|
---|
4407 |
|
---|
4408 | <sect2 id="host-key-customize">
|
---|
4409 |
|
---|
4410 | <title>Host Key Customization</title>
|
---|
4411 |
|
---|
4412 | <para>
|
---|
4413 | To disable all Host key combinations, open the preferences and
|
---|
4414 | change the Host key to None. This might be useful when using
|
---|
4415 | &product-name; in a kiosk mode.
|
---|
4416 | </para>
|
---|
4417 |
|
---|
4418 | <para>
|
---|
4419 | To redefine or disable certain Host key actions, use the
|
---|
4420 | following command:
|
---|
4421 | </para>
|
---|
4422 |
|
---|
4423 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Input/MachineShortcuts "FullscreenMode=F,...."</screen>
|
---|
4424 |
|
---|
4425 | <para>
|
---|
4426 | The following table shows the possible Host key actions,
|
---|
4427 | together with their default Host key shortcut. Setting an action
|
---|
4428 | to None will disable that Host key action.
|
---|
4429 | </para>
|
---|
4430 |
|
---|
4431 | <table id="table-host-key-customize" tabstyle="oracle-all">
|
---|
4432 | <title>Host Key Customization</title>
|
---|
4433 | <tgroup cols="3">
|
---|
4434 | <thead>
|
---|
4435 | <row>
|
---|
4436 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4437 | <emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis>
|
---|
4438 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4439 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4440 | <emphasis role="bold">Default Key</emphasis>
|
---|
4441 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4442 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4443 | <emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis>
|
---|
4444 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4445 | </row>
|
---|
4446 | </thead>
|
---|
4447 | <tbody>
|
---|
4448 | <row>
|
---|
4449 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4450 | <literal>TakeSnapshot</literal>
|
---|
4451 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4452 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4453 | T
|
---|
4454 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4455 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4456 | Take a snapshot
|
---|
4457 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4458 | </row>
|
---|
4459 | <row>
|
---|
4460 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4461 | <literal>TakeScreenshot</literal>
|
---|
4462 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4463 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4464 | E
|
---|
4465 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4466 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4467 | Take a screenshot
|
---|
4468 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4469 | </row>
|
---|
4470 | <row>
|
---|
4471 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4472 | <literal>MouseIntegration</literal>
|
---|
4473 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4474 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4475 | I
|
---|
4476 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4477 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4478 | Toggle mouse integration
|
---|
4479 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4480 | </row>
|
---|
4481 | <row>
|
---|
4482 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4483 | <literal>TypeCAD</literal>
|
---|
4484 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4485 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4486 | Del
|
---|
4487 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4488 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4489 | Inject Ctrl+Alt+Del
|
---|
4490 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4491 | </row>
|
---|
4492 | <row>
|
---|
4493 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4494 | <literal>TypeCABS</literal>
|
---|
4495 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4496 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4497 | Backspace
|
---|
4498 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4499 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4500 | Inject Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|
---|
4501 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4502 | </row>
|
---|
4503 | <row>
|
---|
4504 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4505 | <literal>Pause</literal>
|
---|
4506 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4507 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4508 | P
|
---|
4509 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4510 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4511 | Pause the VM
|
---|
4512 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4513 | </row>
|
---|
4514 | <row>
|
---|
4515 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4516 | <literal>Reset</literal>
|
---|
4517 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4518 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4519 | R
|
---|
4520 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4521 | <entry>Hard reset the guest</entry>
|
---|
4522 | </row>
|
---|
4523 | <row>
|
---|
4524 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4525 | <literal>SaveState</literal>
|
---|
4526 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4527 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
4528 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4529 | Save the VM state and terminate the VM
|
---|
4530 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4531 | </row>
|
---|
4532 | <row>
|
---|
4533 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4534 | <literal>Shutdown</literal>
|
---|
4535 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4536 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4537 | H
|
---|
4538 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4539 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4540 | Press the virtual ACPI power button
|
---|
4541 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4542 | </row>
|
---|
4543 | <row>
|
---|
4544 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4545 | <literal>PowerOff</literal>
|
---|
4546 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4547 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
4548 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4549 | Power off the VM without saving the state
|
---|
4550 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4551 | </row>
|
---|
4552 | <row>
|
---|
4553 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4554 | <literal>Close</literal>
|
---|
4555 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4556 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4557 | Q
|
---|
4558 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4559 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4560 | Show the Close VM dialog
|
---|
4561 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4562 | </row>
|
---|
4563 | <row>
|
---|
4564 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4565 | <literal>FullscreenMode</literal>
|
---|
4566 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4567 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4568 | F
|
---|
4569 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4570 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4571 | Switch the VM into full screen mode
|
---|
4572 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4573 | </row>
|
---|
4574 | <row>
|
---|
4575 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4576 | <literal>SeamlessMode</literal>
|
---|
4577 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4578 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4579 | L
|
---|
4580 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4581 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4582 | Switch the VM into seamless mode
|
---|
4583 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4584 | </row>
|
---|
4585 | <row>
|
---|
4586 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4587 | <literal>ScaleMode</literal>
|
---|
4588 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4589 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4590 | C
|
---|
4591 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4592 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4593 | Switch the VM into scaled mode
|
---|
4594 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4595 | </row>
|
---|
4596 | <row>
|
---|
4597 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4598 | <literal>GuestAutoResize</literal>
|
---|
4599 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4600 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4601 | G
|
---|
4602 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4603 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4604 | Automatically resize the guest window
|
---|
4605 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4606 | </row>
|
---|
4607 | <row>
|
---|
4608 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4609 | <literal>WindowAdjust</literal>
|
---|
4610 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4611 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4612 | A
|
---|
4613 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4614 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4615 | Immediately resize the guest window
|
---|
4616 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4617 | </row>
|
---|
4618 | <row>
|
---|
4619 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4620 | <literal>PopupMenu</literal>
|
---|
4621 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4622 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4623 | Home
|
---|
4624 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4625 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4626 | Show the popup menu in full screen mode and seamless
|
---|
4627 | mode
|
---|
4628 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4629 | </row>
|
---|
4630 | <row>
|
---|
4631 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4632 | <literal>SettingsDialog</literal>
|
---|
4633 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4634 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4635 | S
|
---|
4636 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4637 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4638 | Open the VM Settings dialog
|
---|
4639 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4640 | </row>
|
---|
4641 | <row>
|
---|
4642 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4643 | <literal>InformationDialog</literal>
|
---|
4644 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4645 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4646 | N
|
---|
4647 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4648 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4649 | Show the VM Session Information window
|
---|
4650 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4651 | </row>
|
---|
4652 | <row>
|
---|
4653 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4654 | <literal>NetworkAdaptersDialog</literal>
|
---|
4655 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4656 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
4657 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4658 | Show the VM Network Adapters dialog
|
---|
4659 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4660 | </row>
|
---|
4661 | <row>
|
---|
4662 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4663 | <literal>SharedFoldersDialog</literal>
|
---|
4664 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4665 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
4666 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4667 | Show the VM Shared Folders dialog
|
---|
4668 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4669 | </row>
|
---|
4670 | <row>
|
---|
4671 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4672 | <literal>InstallGuestAdditions</literal>
|
---|
4673 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4674 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4675 | D
|
---|
4676 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4677 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4678 | Mount the ISO containing the Guest Additions
|
---|
4679 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4680 | </row>
|
---|
4681 | </tbody>
|
---|
4682 | </tgroup>
|
---|
4683 | </table>
|
---|
4684 |
|
---|
4685 | <para>
|
---|
4686 | To disable full screen mode and seamless mode, use the following
|
---|
4687 | command:
|
---|
4688 | </para>
|
---|
4689 |
|
---|
4690 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Input/MachineShortcuts "FullscreenMode=None,SeamlessMode=None"</screen>
|
---|
4691 |
|
---|
4692 | </sect2>
|
---|
4693 |
|
---|
4694 | <sect2 id="terminate-vm-action">
|
---|
4695 |
|
---|
4696 | <title>Action when Terminating the VM</title>
|
---|
4697 |
|
---|
4698 | <para>
|
---|
4699 | You can disallow certain actions when terminating a VM. To
|
---|
4700 | disallow specific actions, use the following command:
|
---|
4701 | </para>
|
---|
4702 |
|
---|
4703 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/RestrictedCloseActions <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable>...]</screen>
|
---|
4704 |
|
---|
4705 | <para>
|
---|
4706 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4707 | </para>
|
---|
4708 |
|
---|
4709 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4710 |
|
---|
4711 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4712 | <term>
|
---|
4713 | <literal>SaveState</literal>
|
---|
4714 | </term>
|
---|
4715 |
|
---|
4716 | <listitem>
|
---|
4717 | <para>
|
---|
4718 | Do not allow the user to save the VM state when
|
---|
4719 | terminating the VM.
|
---|
4720 | </para>
|
---|
4721 | </listitem>
|
---|
4722 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4723 |
|
---|
4724 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4725 | <term>
|
---|
4726 | <literal>Shutdown</literal>
|
---|
4727 | </term>
|
---|
4728 |
|
---|
4729 | <listitem>
|
---|
4730 | <para>
|
---|
4731 | Do not allow the user to shutdown the VM by sending the
|
---|
4732 | ACPI power-off event to the guest.
|
---|
4733 | </para>
|
---|
4734 | </listitem>
|
---|
4735 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4736 |
|
---|
4737 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4738 | <term>
|
---|
4739 | <literal>PowerOff</literal>
|
---|
4740 | </term>
|
---|
4741 |
|
---|
4742 | <listitem>
|
---|
4743 | <para>
|
---|
4744 | Do not allow the user to power off the VM.
|
---|
4745 | </para>
|
---|
4746 | </listitem>
|
---|
4747 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4748 |
|
---|
4749 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4750 | <term>
|
---|
4751 | <literal>PowerOffRestoringSnapshot</literal>
|
---|
4752 | </term>
|
---|
4753 |
|
---|
4754 | <listitem>
|
---|
4755 | <para>
|
---|
4756 | Do not allow the user to return to the last snapshot when
|
---|
4757 | powering off the VM.
|
---|
4758 | </para>
|
---|
4759 | </listitem>
|
---|
4760 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4761 |
|
---|
4762 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4763 | <term>
|
---|
4764 | <literal>Detach</literal>
|
---|
4765 | </term>
|
---|
4766 |
|
---|
4767 | <listitem>
|
---|
4768 | <para>
|
---|
4769 | Do not allow the user to detach from the VM process if the
|
---|
4770 | VM was started in separate mode.
|
---|
4771 | </para>
|
---|
4772 | </listitem>
|
---|
4773 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4774 |
|
---|
4775 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4776 |
|
---|
4777 | <para>
|
---|
4778 | This is a per-VM setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
4779 | properties. If all properties are specified, the VM cannot be
|
---|
4780 | shut down.
|
---|
4781 | </para>
|
---|
4782 |
|
---|
4783 | </sect2>
|
---|
4784 |
|
---|
4785 | <sect2 id="terminate-vm-default-action">
|
---|
4786 |
|
---|
4787 | <title>Default Action when Terminating the VM</title>
|
---|
4788 |
|
---|
4789 | <para>
|
---|
4790 | You can define a specific action for terminating a VM. In
|
---|
4791 | contrast to the setting decribed in the previous section, this
|
---|
4792 | setting allows only one action when the user terminates the VM.
|
---|
4793 | No exit menu is shown. Use the following command:
|
---|
4794 | </para>
|
---|
4795 |
|
---|
4796 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/DefaultCloseAction <replaceable>action</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
4797 |
|
---|
4798 | <para>
|
---|
4799 | <replaceable>action</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4800 | </para>
|
---|
4801 |
|
---|
4802 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4803 |
|
---|
4804 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4805 | <term>
|
---|
4806 | <literal>SaveState</literal>
|
---|
4807 | </term>
|
---|
4808 |
|
---|
4809 | <listitem>
|
---|
4810 | <para>
|
---|
4811 | Save the VM state before terminating the VM process.
|
---|
4812 | </para>
|
---|
4813 | </listitem>
|
---|
4814 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4815 |
|
---|
4816 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4817 | <term>
|
---|
4818 | <literal>Shutdown</literal>
|
---|
4819 | </term>
|
---|
4820 |
|
---|
4821 | <listitem>
|
---|
4822 | <para>
|
---|
4823 | The VM is shut down by sending the ACPI power-off event to
|
---|
4824 | the guest.
|
---|
4825 | </para>
|
---|
4826 | </listitem>
|
---|
4827 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4828 |
|
---|
4829 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4830 | <term>
|
---|
4831 | <literal>PowerOff</literal>
|
---|
4832 | </term>
|
---|
4833 |
|
---|
4834 | <listitem>
|
---|
4835 | <para>
|
---|
4836 | The VM is powered off.
|
---|
4837 | </para>
|
---|
4838 | </listitem>
|
---|
4839 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4840 |
|
---|
4841 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4842 | <term>
|
---|
4843 | <literal>PowerOffRestoringSnapshot</literal>
|
---|
4844 | </term>
|
---|
4845 |
|
---|
4846 | <listitem>
|
---|
4847 | <para>
|
---|
4848 | The VM is powered off and the saved state returns to the
|
---|
4849 | last snapshot.
|
---|
4850 | </para>
|
---|
4851 | </listitem>
|
---|
4852 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4853 |
|
---|
4854 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4855 | <term>
|
---|
4856 | <literal>Detach</literal>
|
---|
4857 | </term>
|
---|
4858 |
|
---|
4859 | <listitem>
|
---|
4860 | <para>
|
---|
4861 | Terminate the frontend but leave the VM process running.
|
---|
4862 | </para>
|
---|
4863 | </listitem>
|
---|
4864 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4865 |
|
---|
4866 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4867 |
|
---|
4868 | <para>
|
---|
4869 | This is a per-VM setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
4870 | properties. If all properties are specified, the VM cannot be
|
---|
4871 | shut down.
|
---|
4872 | </para>
|
---|
4873 |
|
---|
4874 | </sect2>
|
---|
4875 |
|
---|
4876 | <sect2 id="guru-meditation-action">
|
---|
4877 |
|
---|
4878 | <title>Action for Handling a Guru Meditation</title>
|
---|
4879 |
|
---|
4880 | <para>
|
---|
4881 | A VM runs into a Guru Meditation if there is a problem which
|
---|
4882 | cannot be fixed by other means than terminating the process. The
|
---|
4883 | default is to show a message window which instructs the user to
|
---|
4884 | open a bug report.
|
---|
4885 | </para>
|
---|
4886 |
|
---|
4887 | <para>
|
---|
4888 | This behavior can be configured as follows:
|
---|
4889 | </para>
|
---|
4890 |
|
---|
4891 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/GuruMeditationHandler <replaceable>mode</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
4892 |
|
---|
4893 | <para>
|
---|
4894 | <replaceable>mode</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4895 | </para>
|
---|
4896 |
|
---|
4897 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4898 |
|
---|
4899 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4900 | <term>
|
---|
4901 | <literal>Default</literal>
|
---|
4902 | </term>
|
---|
4903 |
|
---|
4904 | <listitem>
|
---|
4905 | <para>
|
---|
4906 | A message window is shown. After the user confirmed, the
|
---|
4907 | VM is terminated.
|
---|
4908 | </para>
|
---|
4909 | </listitem>
|
---|
4910 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4911 |
|
---|
4912 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4913 | <term>
|
---|
4914 | <literal>PowerOff</literal>
|
---|
4915 | </term>
|
---|
4916 |
|
---|
4917 | <listitem>
|
---|
4918 | <para>
|
---|
4919 | The VM is immediately powered-off without showing any
|
---|
4920 | message window. The VM logfile will show information about
|
---|
4921 | what happened.
|
---|
4922 | </para>
|
---|
4923 | </listitem>
|
---|
4924 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4925 |
|
---|
4926 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4927 | <term>
|
---|
4928 | <literal>Ignore</literal>
|
---|
4929 | </term>
|
---|
4930 |
|
---|
4931 | <listitem>
|
---|
4932 | <para>
|
---|
4933 | The VM is left in stuck mode. Execution is stopped but no
|
---|
4934 | message window is shown. The VM has to be powered off
|
---|
4935 | manually.
|
---|
4936 | </para>
|
---|
4937 | </listitem>
|
---|
4938 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4939 |
|
---|
4940 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4941 |
|
---|
4942 | <para>
|
---|
4943 | This is a per-VM setting.
|
---|
4944 | </para>
|
---|
4945 |
|
---|
4946 | </sect2>
|
---|
4947 |
|
---|
4948 | <sect2 id="mouse-capture">
|
---|
4949 |
|
---|
4950 | <title>Configuring Automatic Mouse Capturing</title>
|
---|
4951 |
|
---|
4952 | <para>
|
---|
4953 | By default, the mouse is captured if the user clicks on the
|
---|
4954 | guest window and the guest expects relative mouse coordinates at
|
---|
4955 | this time. This happens if the pointing device is configured as
|
---|
4956 | PS/2 mouse and the guest has not yet started the &product-name;
|
---|
4957 | Guest Additions. For instance, the guest is booting or the Guest
|
---|
4958 | Additions are not installed, or if the pointing device is
|
---|
4959 | configured as a USB tablet but the guest has no USB driver
|
---|
4960 | loaded yet. Once the Guest Additions become active or the USB
|
---|
4961 | guest driver is started, the mouse capture is automatically
|
---|
4962 | released.
|
---|
4963 | </para>
|
---|
4964 |
|
---|
4965 | <para>
|
---|
4966 | The default behavior is sometimes not desired. Therefore it can
|
---|
4967 | be configured as follows:
|
---|
4968 | </para>
|
---|
4969 |
|
---|
4970 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/MouseCapturePolicy <replaceable>mode</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
4971 |
|
---|
4972 | <para>
|
---|
4973 | <replaceable>mode</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4974 | </para>
|
---|
4975 |
|
---|
4976 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4977 |
|
---|
4978 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4979 | <term>
|
---|
4980 | <literal>Default</literal>
|
---|
4981 | </term>
|
---|
4982 |
|
---|
4983 | <listitem>
|
---|
4984 | <para>
|
---|
4985 | The default behavior as described above.
|
---|
4986 | </para>
|
---|
4987 | </listitem>
|
---|
4988 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4989 |
|
---|
4990 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4991 | <term>
|
---|
4992 | <literal>HostComboOnly</literal>
|
---|
4993 | </term>
|
---|
4994 |
|
---|
4995 | <listitem>
|
---|
4996 | <para>
|
---|
4997 | The mouse is only captured if the Host Key is toggled.
|
---|
4998 | </para>
|
---|
4999 | </listitem>
|
---|
5000 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5001 |
|
---|
5002 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5003 | <term>
|
---|
5004 | <literal>Disabled</literal>
|
---|
5005 | </term>
|
---|
5006 |
|
---|
5007 | <listitem>
|
---|
5008 | <para>
|
---|
5009 | The mouse is never captured, also not by toggling the Host
|
---|
5010 | Key
|
---|
5011 | </para>
|
---|
5012 | </listitem>
|
---|
5013 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5014 |
|
---|
5015 | </variablelist>
|
---|
5016 |
|
---|
5017 | <para>
|
---|
5018 | This is a per-VM setting.
|
---|
5019 | </para>
|
---|
5020 |
|
---|
5021 | </sect2>
|
---|
5022 |
|
---|
5023 | <sect2 id="legacy-fullscreen-mode">
|
---|
5024 |
|
---|
5025 | <title>Requesting Legacy Full-Screen Mode</title>
|
---|
5026 |
|
---|
5027 | <para>
|
---|
5028 | &product-name; uses special window manager facilities to switch
|
---|
5029 | a multi-screen machine to full-screen on a multi-monitor host
|
---|
5030 | system. However, not all window managers provide these
|
---|
5031 | facilities correctly. &product-name; can be configured to use a
|
---|
5032 | legacy method of switching to full-screen mode instead, by using
|
---|
5033 | the command:
|
---|
5034 | </para>
|
---|
5035 |
|
---|
5036 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Fullscreen/LegacyMode true</screen>
|
---|
5037 |
|
---|
5038 | <para>
|
---|
5039 | You can go back to the default method by using the following
|
---|
5040 | command:
|
---|
5041 | </para>
|
---|
5042 |
|
---|
5043 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Fullscreen/LegacyMode</screen>
|
---|
5044 |
|
---|
5045 | <para>
|
---|
5046 | This is a global setting.
|
---|
5047 | </para>
|
---|
5048 |
|
---|
5049 | </sect2>
|
---|
5050 |
|
---|
5051 | <sect2 id="restrict-network-attachments">
|
---|
5052 |
|
---|
5053 | <title>Removing Certain Modes of Networking From the GUI</title>
|
---|
5054 |
|
---|
5055 | <para>
|
---|
5056 | It is possible to remove networking modes from &product-name;
|
---|
5057 | GUI. To do this, use the following command:
|
---|
5058 | </para>
|
---|
5059 |
|
---|
5060 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/RestrictedNetworkAttachmentTypes <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable>...]</screen>
|
---|
5061 |
|
---|
5062 | <para>
|
---|
5063 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
5064 | </para>
|
---|
5065 |
|
---|
5066 | <variablelist>
|
---|
5067 |
|
---|
5068 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5069 | <term>
|
---|
5070 | <literal>NAT</literal>
|
---|
5071 | </term>
|
---|
5072 |
|
---|
5073 | <listitem>
|
---|
5074 | <para>
|
---|
5075 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">NAT</emphasis> option
|
---|
5076 | from the GUI.
|
---|
5077 | </para>
|
---|
5078 | </listitem>
|
---|
5079 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5080 |
|
---|
5081 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5082 | <term>
|
---|
5083 | <literal>NATNetwork</literal>
|
---|
5084 | </term>
|
---|
5085 |
|
---|
5086 | <listitem>
|
---|
5087 | <para>
|
---|
5088 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">NAT network</emphasis>
|
---|
5089 | option from the GUI.
|
---|
5090 | </para>
|
---|
5091 | </listitem>
|
---|
5092 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5093 |
|
---|
5094 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5095 | <term>
|
---|
5096 | <literal>BridgedAdapter</literal>
|
---|
5097 | </term>
|
---|
5098 |
|
---|
5099 | <listitem>
|
---|
5100 | <para>
|
---|
5101 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">Bridged
|
---|
5102 | networking</emphasis> option from the GUI.
|
---|
5103 | </para>
|
---|
5104 | </listitem>
|
---|
5105 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5106 |
|
---|
5107 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5108 | <term>
|
---|
5109 | <literal>InternalNetwork</literal>
|
---|
5110 | </term>
|
---|
5111 |
|
---|
5112 | <listitem>
|
---|
5113 | <para>
|
---|
5114 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">Internal
|
---|
5115 | networking</emphasis> option from the GUI.
|
---|
5116 | </para>
|
---|
5117 | </listitem>
|
---|
5118 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5119 |
|
---|
5120 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5121 | <term>
|
---|
5122 | <literal>HostOnlyAdapter</literal>
|
---|
5123 | </term>
|
---|
5124 |
|
---|
5125 | <listitem>
|
---|
5126 | <para>
|
---|
5127 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">Host Only
|
---|
5128 | networking</emphasis> option from the GUI.
|
---|
5129 | </para>
|
---|
5130 | </listitem>
|
---|
5131 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5132 |
|
---|
5133 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5134 | <term>
|
---|
5135 | <literal>GenericDriver</literal>
|
---|
5136 | </term>
|
---|
5137 |
|
---|
5138 | <listitem>
|
---|
5139 | <para>
|
---|
5140 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">Generic
|
---|
5141 | networking</emphasis> option from the GUI.
|
---|
5142 | </para>
|
---|
5143 | </listitem>
|
---|
5144 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5145 |
|
---|
5146 | </variablelist>
|
---|
5147 |
|
---|
5148 | <para>
|
---|
5149 | This is a global setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
5150 | properties. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
5151 | command:
|
---|
5152 | </para>
|
---|
5153 |
|
---|
5154 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/RestrictedNetworkAttachmentTypes</screen>
|
---|
5155 |
|
---|
5156 | </sect2>
|
---|
5157 |
|
---|
5158 | </sect1>
|
---|
5159 |
|
---|
5160 | <sect1 id="vboxwebsrv-daemon">
|
---|
5161 |
|
---|
5162 | <title>Starting the &product-name; Web Service Automatically</title>
|
---|
5163 |
|
---|
5164 | <para>
|
---|
5165 | The &product-name; web service, <command>vboxwebsrv</command>, is
|
---|
5166 | used for controlling &product-name; remotely. It is documented in
|
---|
5167 | detail in the &product-name; Software Development Kit (SDK). See
|
---|
5168 | <xref linkend="VirtualBoxAPI" />. Web service start scripts are
|
---|
5169 | available for supported host operating systems. The following
|
---|
5170 | sections describe how to use the scripts. The &product-name; web
|
---|
5171 | service is never started automatically as a result of a standard
|
---|
5172 | installation.
|
---|
5173 | </para>
|
---|
5174 |
|
---|
5175 | <sect2 id="vboxwebsrv-linux">
|
---|
5176 |
|
---|
5177 | <title>Linux: Starting the Web Service With init</title>
|
---|
5178 |
|
---|
5179 | <para>
|
---|
5180 | On Linux, the web service can be automatically started during
|
---|
5181 | host boot by adding appropriate parameters to the file
|
---|
5182 | <filename>/etc/default/virtualbox</filename>. There is one
|
---|
5183 | mandatory parameter, <literal>VBOXWEB_USER</literal>, which must
|
---|
5184 | be set to the user which will later start the VMs. The
|
---|
5185 | parameters in the following table all start with the
|
---|
5186 | <literal>VBOXWEB_</literal> prefix string. For example:
|
---|
5187 | <literal>VBOXWEB_HOST</literal> and
|
---|
5188 | <literal>VBOXWEB_PORT</literal>.
|
---|
5189 | </para>
|
---|
5190 |
|
---|
5191 | <table id="table-websrv-config-params" tabstyle="oracle-all">
|
---|
5192 | <title>Web Service Configuration Parameters</title>
|
---|
5193 | <tgroup cols="3">
|
---|
5194 | <thead>
|
---|
5195 | <row>
|
---|
5196 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5197 | <emphasis role="bold">Parameter</emphasis>
|
---|
5198 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5199 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5200 | <emphasis role="bold">Description</emphasis>
|
---|
5201 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5202 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5203 | <emphasis role="bold">Default</emphasis>
|
---|
5204 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5205 | </row>
|
---|
5206 | </thead>
|
---|
5207 | <tbody>
|
---|
5208 | <row>
|
---|
5209 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5210 | <literal>USER</literal>
|
---|
5211 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5212 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5213 | The user which the web service runs as
|
---|
5214 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5215 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5216 | </row>
|
---|
5217 | <row>
|
---|
5218 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5219 | <literal>HOST</literal>
|
---|
5220 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5221 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5222 | The host to bind the web service to
|
---|
5223 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5224 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5225 | localhost
|
---|
5226 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5227 | </row>
|
---|
5228 | <row>
|
---|
5229 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5230 | <literal>PORT</literal>
|
---|
5231 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5232 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5233 | The port to bind the web service to
|
---|
5234 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5235 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5236 | 18083
|
---|
5237 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5238 | </row>
|
---|
5239 | <row>
|
---|
5240 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5241 | <literal>SSL_KEYFILE</literal>
|
---|
5242 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5243 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5244 | Server key and certificate file, in PEM format
|
---|
5245 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5246 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5247 | </row>
|
---|
5248 | <row>
|
---|
5249 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5250 | <literal>SSL_PASSWORDFILE</literal>
|
---|
5251 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5252 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5253 | File name for password to server key
|
---|
5254 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5255 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5256 | </row>
|
---|
5257 | <row>
|
---|
5258 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5259 | <literal>SSL_CACERT</literal>
|
---|
5260 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5261 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5262 | CA certificate file, in PEM format
|
---|
5263 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5264 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5265 | </row>
|
---|
5266 | <row>
|
---|
5267 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5268 | <literal>SSL_CAPATH</literal>
|
---|
5269 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5270 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5271 | CA certificate path
|
---|
5272 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5273 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5274 | </row>
|
---|
5275 | <row>
|
---|
5276 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5277 | <literal>SSL_DHFILE</literal>
|
---|
5278 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5279 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5280 | DH file name or DH key length in bits
|
---|
5281 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5282 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5283 | </row>
|
---|
5284 | <row>
|
---|
5285 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5286 | <literal>SSL_RANDFILE</literal>
|
---|
5287 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5288 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5289 | File containing seed for random number generator
|
---|
5290 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5291 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5292 | </row>
|
---|
5293 | <row>
|
---|
5294 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5295 | <literal>TIMEOUT</literal>
|
---|
5296 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5297 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5298 | Session timeout in seconds, 0 disables timeouts
|
---|
5299 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5300 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5301 | 300
|
---|
5302 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5303 | </row>
|
---|
5304 | <row>
|
---|
5305 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5306 | <literal>CHECK_INTERVAL</literal>
|
---|
5307 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5308 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5309 | Frequency of timeout checks in seconds
|
---|
5310 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5311 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5312 | 5
|
---|
5313 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5314 | </row>
|
---|
5315 | <row>
|
---|
5316 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5317 | <literal>THREADS</literal>
|
---|
5318 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5319 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5320 | Maximum number of worker threads to run in parallel
|
---|
5321 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5322 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5323 | 100
|
---|
5324 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5325 | </row>
|
---|
5326 | <row>
|
---|
5327 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5328 | <literal>KEEPALIVE</literal>
|
---|
5329 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5330 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5331 | Maximum number of requests before a socket will be
|
---|
5332 | closed
|
---|
5333 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5334 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5335 | 100
|
---|
5336 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5337 | </row>
|
---|
5338 | <row>
|
---|
5339 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5340 | <literal>ROTATE</literal>
|
---|
5341 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5342 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5343 | Number of log files, 0 disables log rotation
|
---|
5344 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5345 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5346 | 10
|
---|
5347 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5348 | </row>
|
---|
5349 | <row>
|
---|
5350 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5351 | <literal>LOGSIZE</literal>
|
---|
5352 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5353 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5354 | Maximum log file size to trigger rotation, in bytes
|
---|
5355 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5356 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5357 | 1MB
|
---|
5358 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5359 | </row>
|
---|
5360 | <row>
|
---|
5361 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5362 | <literal>LOGINTERVAL</literal>
|
---|
5363 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5364 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5365 | Maximum time interval to trigger log rotation, in
|
---|
5366 | seconds
|
---|
5367 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5368 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5369 | 1 day
|
---|
5370 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5371 | </row>
|
---|
5372 | </tbody>
|
---|
5373 | </tgroup>
|
---|
5374 | </table>
|
---|
5375 |
|
---|
5376 | <para>
|
---|
5377 | Setting the parameter <literal>SSL_KEYFILE</literal> enables the
|
---|
5378 | SSL/TLS support. Using encryption is strongly encouraged, as
|
---|
5379 | otherwise everything, including passwords, is transferred in
|
---|
5380 | clear text.
|
---|
5381 | </para>
|
---|
5382 |
|
---|
5383 | </sect2>
|
---|
5384 |
|
---|
5385 | <sect2 id="vboxwebsrv-solaris">
|
---|
5386 |
|
---|
5387 | <title>Oracle Solaris: Starting the Web Service With SMF</title>
|
---|
5388 |
|
---|
5389 | <para>
|
---|
5390 | On Oracle Solaris hosts, the &product-name; web service daemon
|
---|
5391 | is integrated into the SMF framework. You can change the
|
---|
5392 | parameters, but do not have to if the defaults below already
|
---|
5393 | match your needs:
|
---|
5394 | </para>
|
---|
5395 |
|
---|
5396 | <screen>svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default setprop config/host=localhost
|
---|
5397 | svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default setprop config/port=18083
|
---|
5398 | svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default setprop config/user=root</screen>
|
---|
5399 |
|
---|
5400 | <para>
|
---|
5401 | The table in <xref linkend="vboxwebsrv-linux"/> showing the
|
---|
5402 | parameter names and defaults also applies for Oracle Solaris.
|
---|
5403 | The parameter names must be changed to lowercase and a prefix of
|
---|
5404 | <literal>config/</literal> has to be added. For example:
|
---|
5405 | <literal>config/user</literal> or
|
---|
5406 | <literal>config/ssl_keyfile</literal>. If you make any change,
|
---|
5407 | do not forget to run the following command to put the changes
|
---|
5408 | into effect immediately:
|
---|
5409 | </para>
|
---|
5410 |
|
---|
5411 | <screen>svcadm refresh svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default</screen>
|
---|
5412 |
|
---|
5413 | <para>
|
---|
5414 | If you forget the above command then the previous settings are
|
---|
5415 | used when enabling the service. Check the current property
|
---|
5416 | settings as follows:
|
---|
5417 | </para>
|
---|
5418 |
|
---|
5419 | <screen>svcprop -p config svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default</screen>
|
---|
5420 |
|
---|
5421 | <para>
|
---|
5422 | When everything is configured correctly you can start the
|
---|
5423 | &product-name; web service with the following command:
|
---|
5424 | </para>
|
---|
5425 |
|
---|
5426 | <screen>svcadm enable svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default</screen>
|
---|
5427 |
|
---|
5428 | <para>
|
---|
5429 | For more information about SMF, please refer to the Oracle
|
---|
5430 | Solaris documentation.
|
---|
5431 | </para>
|
---|
5432 |
|
---|
5433 | </sect2>
|
---|
5434 |
|
---|
5435 | <sect2 id="vboxwebsrv-osx">
|
---|
5436 |
|
---|
5437 | <title>Mac OS X: Starting the Web Service With launchd</title>
|
---|
5438 |
|
---|
5439 | <para>
|
---|
5440 | On Mac OS X, launchd is used to start the &product-name;
|
---|
5441 | webservice. An example configuration file can be found in
|
---|
5442 | <filename>$HOME/Library/LaunchAgents/org.virtualbox.vboxwebsrv.plist</filename>.
|
---|
5443 | It can be enabled by changing the <literal>Disabled</literal>
|
---|
5444 | key from <literal>true</literal> to <literal>false</literal>. To
|
---|
5445 | manually start the service use the following command:
|
---|
5446 | </para>
|
---|
5447 |
|
---|
5448 | <screen>launchctl load ~/Library/LaunchAgents/org.virtualbox.vboxwebsrv.plist</screen>
|
---|
5449 |
|
---|
5450 | <para>
|
---|
5451 | For additional information on how launchd services could be
|
---|
5452 | configured see:
|
---|
5453 | </para>
|
---|
5454 |
|
---|
5455 | <para>
|
---|
5456 | <ulink
|
---|
5457 | url="https://developer.apple.com/library/mac/documentation/MacOSX/Conceptual/BPSystemStartup/Chapters/CreatingLaunchdJobs.html" />.
|
---|
5458 | </para>
|
---|
5459 |
|
---|
5460 | </sect2>
|
---|
5461 |
|
---|
5462 | </sect1>
|
---|
5463 |
|
---|
5464 | <sect1 id="vboxwatchdog">
|
---|
5465 |
|
---|
5466 | <title>&product-name; Watchdog</title>
|
---|
5467 |
|
---|
5468 | <para>
|
---|
5469 | The memory ballooning service, formerly known as
|
---|
5470 | <command>VBoxBalloonCtrl</command>, was renamed to VBoxWatchdog.
|
---|
5471 | This service now incorporates the following host services that are
|
---|
5472 | meant to be run in a server environment:
|
---|
5473 | </para>
|
---|
5474 |
|
---|
5475 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
5476 |
|
---|
5477 | <listitem>
|
---|
5478 | <para>
|
---|
5479 | <emphasis role="bold">Memory ballooning control.</emphasis>
|
---|
5480 | This service automatically takes care of a VM's configured
|
---|
5481 | memory balloon. See <xref linkend="guestadd-balloon" />. This
|
---|
5482 | service is useful for server environments where VMs may
|
---|
5483 | dynamically require more or less memory during runtime.
|
---|
5484 | </para>
|
---|
5485 |
|
---|
5486 | <para>
|
---|
5487 | The service periodically checks a VM's current memory balloon
|
---|
5488 | and its free guest RAM and automatically adjusts the current
|
---|
5489 | memory balloon by inflating or deflating it accordingly. This
|
---|
5490 | handling only applies to running VMs having recent Guest
|
---|
5491 | Additions installed.
|
---|
5492 | </para>
|
---|
5493 | </listitem>
|
---|
5494 |
|
---|
5495 | <listitem>
|
---|
5496 | <para>
|
---|
5497 | <emphasis role="bold">Host isolation detection.</emphasis>
|
---|
5498 | This service provides a way to detect whether the host cannot
|
---|
5499 | reach the specific &product-name; server instance anymore and
|
---|
5500 | take appropriate actions, such as shutting down, saving the
|
---|
5501 | current state or even powering down certain VMs.
|
---|
5502 | </para>
|
---|
5503 | </listitem>
|
---|
5504 |
|
---|
5505 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
5506 |
|
---|
5507 | <para>
|
---|
5508 | All configuration values can be either specified using the command
|
---|
5509 | line or global extradata, whereas command line values always have
|
---|
5510 | a higher priority when set. Some of the configuration values also
|
---|
5511 | be specified on a per-VM basis. So the overall lookup order is:
|
---|
5512 | command line, per-VM basis extradata if available, global
|
---|
5513 | extradata.
|
---|
5514 | </para>
|
---|
5515 |
|
---|
5516 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-ballonctrl">
|
---|
5517 |
|
---|
5518 | <title>Memory Ballooning Control</title>
|
---|
5519 |
|
---|
5520 | <para>
|
---|
5521 | The memory ballooning control inflates and deflates the memory
|
---|
5522 | balloon of VMs based on the VMs free memory and the desired
|
---|
5523 | maximum balloon size.
|
---|
5524 | </para>
|
---|
5525 |
|
---|
5526 | <para>
|
---|
5527 | To set up the memory ballooning control the maximum ballooning
|
---|
5528 | size a VM can reach needs to be set. This can be specified using
|
---|
5529 | the command line, as follows:
|
---|
5530 | </para>
|
---|
5531 |
|
---|
5532 | <screen>--balloon-max <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5533 |
|
---|
5534 | <para>
|
---|
5535 | Using a per-VM basis extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5536 | </para>
|
---|
5537 |
|
---|
5538 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <VM-Name> VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonSizeMax <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5539 |
|
---|
5540 | <para>
|
---|
5541 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5542 | </para>
|
---|
5543 |
|
---|
5544 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonSizeMax <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5545 |
|
---|
5546 | <note>
|
---|
5547 | <para>
|
---|
5548 | If no maximum ballooning size is specified by at least one of
|
---|
5549 | the parameters above, no ballooning will be performed at all.
|
---|
5550 | </para>
|
---|
5551 | </note>
|
---|
5552 |
|
---|
5553 | <para>
|
---|
5554 | Setting the ballooning increment in MB can be either done using
|
---|
5555 | command line, as follows:
|
---|
5556 | </para>
|
---|
5557 |
|
---|
5558 | <screen>--balloon-inc <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5559 |
|
---|
5560 | <para>
|
---|
5561 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5562 | </para>
|
---|
5563 |
|
---|
5564 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonIncrementMB <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5565 |
|
---|
5566 | <para>
|
---|
5567 | The default ballooning increment is 256 MB if not specified.
|
---|
5568 | </para>
|
---|
5569 |
|
---|
5570 | <para>
|
---|
5571 | The same options apply for a ballooning decrement. Using the
|
---|
5572 | command line, as follows:
|
---|
5573 | </para>
|
---|
5574 |
|
---|
5575 | <screen>--balloon-dec <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5576 |
|
---|
5577 | <para>
|
---|
5578 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5579 | </para>
|
---|
5580 |
|
---|
5581 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonDecrementMB <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5582 |
|
---|
5583 | <para>
|
---|
5584 | The default ballooning decrement is 128 MB if not specified.
|
---|
5585 | </para>
|
---|
5586 |
|
---|
5587 | <para>
|
---|
5588 | The lower limit in MB for a balloon can be defined using the
|
---|
5589 | command line, as follows:
|
---|
5590 | </para>
|
---|
5591 |
|
---|
5592 | <screen>--balloon-lower-limit <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5593 |
|
---|
5594 | <para>
|
---|
5595 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5596 | </para>
|
---|
5597 |
|
---|
5598 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonLowerLimitMB <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5599 |
|
---|
5600 | <para>
|
---|
5601 | The default lower limit is 128 MB if not specified.
|
---|
5602 | </para>
|
---|
5603 |
|
---|
5604 | </sect2>
|
---|
5605 |
|
---|
5606 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-hostisln">
|
---|
5607 |
|
---|
5608 | <title>Host Isolation Detection</title>
|
---|
5609 |
|
---|
5610 | <para>
|
---|
5611 | To detect whether a host is being isolated, that is, the host
|
---|
5612 | cannot reach the &product-name; server instance anymore, the
|
---|
5613 | host needs to set an alternating value to a global extradata
|
---|
5614 | value within a time period. If this value is not set within that
|
---|
5615 | time period a timeout occurred and the so-called host isolation
|
---|
5616 | response will be performed to the VMs handled. Which VMs are
|
---|
5617 | handled can be controlled by defining VM groups and assigning
|
---|
5618 | VMs to those groups. By default no groups are set, meaning that
|
---|
5619 | all VMs on the server will be handled when no host response is
|
---|
5620 | received within 30 seconds.
|
---|
5621 | </para>
|
---|
5622 |
|
---|
5623 | <para>
|
---|
5624 | Set the groups handled by the host isolation detection using the
|
---|
5625 | following command line:
|
---|
5626 | </para>
|
---|
5627 |
|
---|
5628 | <screen>--apimon-groups=<string[,stringN]></screen>
|
---|
5629 |
|
---|
5630 | <para>
|
---|
5631 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5632 | </para>
|
---|
5633 |
|
---|
5634 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/APIMonitor/Groups <string[,stringN]></screen>
|
---|
5635 |
|
---|
5636 | <para>
|
---|
5637 | Set the host isolation timeout using the following command line:
|
---|
5638 | </para>
|
---|
5639 |
|
---|
5640 | <screen>--apimon-isln-timeout=<ms></screen>
|
---|
5641 |
|
---|
5642 | <para>
|
---|
5643 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5644 | </para>
|
---|
5645 |
|
---|
5646 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/APIMonitor/IsolationTimeoutMS <ms></screen>
|
---|
5647 |
|
---|
5648 | <para>
|
---|
5649 | Set the actual host isolation response using the following
|
---|
5650 | command line:
|
---|
5651 | </para>
|
---|
5652 |
|
---|
5653 | <screen>--apimon-isln-response=<cmd></screen>
|
---|
5654 |
|
---|
5655 | <para>
|
---|
5656 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5657 | </para>
|
---|
5658 |
|
---|
5659 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/APIMonitor/IsolationResponse <cmd></screen>
|
---|
5660 |
|
---|
5661 | <para>
|
---|
5662 | The following response commands are available:
|
---|
5663 | </para>
|
---|
5664 |
|
---|
5665 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
5666 |
|
---|
5667 | <listitem>
|
---|
5668 | <para>
|
---|
5669 | <literal>none</literal>. This has no effect.
|
---|
5670 | </para>
|
---|
5671 | </listitem>
|
---|
5672 |
|
---|
5673 | <listitem>
|
---|
5674 | <para>
|
---|
5675 | <literal>pause</literal>. Pauses the execution of a VM.
|
---|
5676 | </para>
|
---|
5677 | </listitem>
|
---|
5678 |
|
---|
5679 | <listitem>
|
---|
5680 | <para>
|
---|
5681 | <literal>poweroff</literal>. Shuts down the VM by pressing
|
---|
5682 | the virtual power button. The VM will not have the chance of
|
---|
5683 | saving any data or veto the shutdown process.
|
---|
5684 | </para>
|
---|
5685 | </listitem>
|
---|
5686 |
|
---|
5687 | <listitem>
|
---|
5688 | <para>
|
---|
5689 | <literal>save</literal>. Saves the current machine state and
|
---|
5690 | powers off the VM afterwards. If saving the machine state
|
---|
5691 | fails the VM will be paused.
|
---|
5692 | </para>
|
---|
5693 | </listitem>
|
---|
5694 |
|
---|
5695 | <listitem>
|
---|
5696 | <para>
|
---|
5697 | <literal>shutdown</literal>. Shuts down the VM in a gentle
|
---|
5698 | way by sending an <literal>ACPI</literal> shutdown event to
|
---|
5699 | the VM's operating system. The OS then has the chance of
|
---|
5700 | doing a clean shutdown.
|
---|
5701 | </para>
|
---|
5702 | </listitem>
|
---|
5703 |
|
---|
5704 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
5705 |
|
---|
5706 | </sect2>
|
---|
5707 |
|
---|
5708 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-moreinfo">
|
---|
5709 |
|
---|
5710 | <title>More Information</title>
|
---|
5711 |
|
---|
5712 | <para>
|
---|
5713 | For more advanced options and parameters like verbose logging
|
---|
5714 | check the built-in command line help accessible with
|
---|
5715 | <option>--help</option>.
|
---|
5716 | </para>
|
---|
5717 |
|
---|
5718 | </sect2>
|
---|
5719 |
|
---|
5720 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-linux">
|
---|
5721 |
|
---|
5722 | <title>Linux: Starting the Watchdog Service With init</title>
|
---|
5723 |
|
---|
5724 | <para>
|
---|
5725 | On Linux, the watchdog service can be automatically started
|
---|
5726 | during host boot by adding appropriate parameters to the file
|
---|
5727 | <filename>/etc/default/virtualbox</filename>. There is one
|
---|
5728 | mandatory parameter, <literal>VBOXWATCHDOG_USER</literal>, which
|
---|
5729 | must be set to the user which will later start the VMs. For
|
---|
5730 | backward compatibility you can also specify
|
---|
5731 | <literal>VBOXBALLOONCTRL_USER</literal>.
|
---|
5732 | </para>
|
---|
5733 |
|
---|
5734 | <para>
|
---|
5735 | The parameters in the following table all start with the
|
---|
5736 | <literal>VBOXWATCHDOG_</literal> prefix string. For example:
|
---|
5737 | <literal>VBOXWATCHDOG_BALLOON_INTERVAL</literal> and
|
---|
5738 | <literal>VBOXWATCHDOG_LOGSIZE</literal>. Legacy parameters such
|
---|
5739 | as <literal>VBOXBALLOONCTRL_INTERVAL</literal> can still be
|
---|
5740 | used.
|
---|
5741 | </para>
|
---|
5742 |
|
---|
5743 | <table id="table-vboxwatchdog-config-params" tabstyle="oracle-all">
|
---|
5744 | <title>&product-name; Watchdog Configuration Parameters</title>
|
---|
5745 | <tgroup cols="3">
|
---|
5746 | <thead>
|
---|
5747 | <row>
|
---|
5748 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5749 | <emphasis role="bold">Parameter</emphasis>
|
---|
5750 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5751 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5752 | <emphasis role="bold">Description</emphasis>
|
---|
5753 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5754 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5755 | <emphasis role="bold">Default</emphasis>
|
---|
5756 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5757 | </row>
|
---|
5758 | </thead>
|
---|
5759 | <tbody>
|
---|
5760 | <row>
|
---|
5761 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5762 | <literal>USER</literal>
|
---|
5763 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5764 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5765 | The user which the watchdog service runs as
|
---|
5766 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5767 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5768 | </row>
|
---|
5769 | <row>
|
---|
5770 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5771 | <literal>ROTATE</literal>
|
---|
5772 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5773 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5774 | Number of log files, 0 disables log rotation
|
---|
5775 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5776 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5777 | 10
|
---|
5778 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5779 | </row>
|
---|
5780 | <row>
|
---|
5781 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5782 | <literal>LOGSIZE</literal>
|
---|
5783 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5784 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5785 | Maximum log file size to trigger rotation, in bytes
|
---|
5786 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5787 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5788 | 1MB
|
---|
5789 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5790 | </row>
|
---|
5791 | <row>
|
---|
5792 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5793 | <literal>LOGINTERVAL</literal>
|
---|
5794 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5795 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5796 | Maximum time interval to trigger log rotation, in
|
---|
5797 | seconds
|
---|
5798 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5799 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5800 | 1 day
|
---|
5801 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5802 | </row>
|
---|
5803 | <row>
|
---|
5804 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5805 | <literal>BALLOON_INTERVAL</literal>
|
---|
5806 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5807 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5808 | Interval for checking the balloon size, in
|
---|
5809 | milliseconds
|
---|
5810 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5811 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5812 | 30000
|
---|
5813 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5814 | </row>
|
---|
5815 | <row>
|
---|
5816 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5817 | <literal>BALLOON_INCREMENT</literal>
|
---|
5818 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5819 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5820 | Balloon size increment, in megabytes
|
---|
5821 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5822 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5823 | 256
|
---|
5824 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5825 | </row>
|
---|
5826 | <row>
|
---|
5827 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5828 | <literal>BALLOON_DECREMENT</literal>
|
---|
5829 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5830 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5831 | Balloon size decrement, in megabytes
|
---|
5832 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5833 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5834 | 128
|
---|
5835 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5836 | </row>
|
---|
5837 | <row>
|
---|
5838 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5839 | <literal>BALLOON_LOWERLIMIT</literal>
|
---|
5840 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5841 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5842 | Balloon size lower limit, in megabytes
|
---|
5843 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5844 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5845 | 64
|
---|
5846 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5847 | </row>
|
---|
5848 | <row>
|
---|
5849 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5850 | <literal>BALLOON_SAFETYMARGIN</literal>
|
---|
5851 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5852 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5853 | Free memory required for decreasing the balloon size,
|
---|
5854 | in megabytes
|
---|
5855 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5856 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5857 | 1024
|
---|
5858 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5859 | </row>
|
---|
5860 | </tbody>
|
---|
5861 | </tgroup>
|
---|
5862 | </table>
|
---|
5863 |
|
---|
5864 | </sect2>
|
---|
5865 |
|
---|
5866 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-solaris">
|
---|
5867 |
|
---|
5868 | <title>Oracle Solaris: Starting the Watchdog Service With SMF</title>
|
---|
5869 |
|
---|
5870 | <para>
|
---|
5871 | On Oracle Solaris hosts, the &product-name; watchdog service
|
---|
5872 | daemon is integrated into the SMF framework. You can change the
|
---|
5873 | parameters, but do not have to if the defaults already match
|
---|
5874 | your needs:
|
---|
5875 | </para>
|
---|
5876 |
|
---|
5877 | <screen>svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default setprop \
|
---|
5878 | config/balloon_interval=10000
|
---|
5879 | svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default setprop \
|
---|
5880 | config/balloon_safetymargin=134217728</screen>
|
---|
5881 |
|
---|
5882 | <para>
|
---|
5883 | <xref linkend="table-vboxwatchdog-config-params"/> also applies
|
---|
5884 | for Oracle Solaris. The parameter names must be changed to
|
---|
5885 | lowercase and a prefix of <literal>config/</literal> has to be
|
---|
5886 | added. For example: <literal>config/user</literal> or
|
---|
5887 | <literal>config/balloon_safetymargin</literal>. If you made any
|
---|
5888 | change, do not forget to run the following command to put the
|
---|
5889 | changes into effect immediately:
|
---|
5890 | </para>
|
---|
5891 |
|
---|
5892 | <screen>svcadm refresh svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default</screen>
|
---|
5893 |
|
---|
5894 | <para>
|
---|
5895 | If you forget the above command then the previous settings will
|
---|
5896 | be used when enabling the service. Check the current property
|
---|
5897 | settings with the following command:
|
---|
5898 | </para>
|
---|
5899 |
|
---|
5900 | <screen>svcprop -p config svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default</screen>
|
---|
5901 |
|
---|
5902 | <para>
|
---|
5903 | When everything is configured correctly you can start the
|
---|
5904 | &product-name; watchdog service with the following command:
|
---|
5905 | </para>
|
---|
5906 |
|
---|
5907 | <screen>svcadm enable svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default</screen>
|
---|
5908 |
|
---|
5909 | <para>
|
---|
5910 | For more information about SMF, please refer to the Oracle
|
---|
5911 | Solaris documentation.
|
---|
5912 | </para>
|
---|
5913 |
|
---|
5914 | </sect2>
|
---|
5915 |
|
---|
5916 | </sect1>
|
---|
5917 |
|
---|
5918 | <sect1 id="otherextpacks">
|
---|
5919 |
|
---|
5920 | <title>Other Extension Packs</title>
|
---|
5921 |
|
---|
5922 | <para>
|
---|
5923 | Another extension pack called VNC is available. This extension
|
---|
5924 | pack is open source and replaces the previous integration of the
|
---|
5925 | VNC remote access protocol. This is experimental code, and is
|
---|
5926 | initially available in the &product-name; source code package
|
---|
5927 | only. It is to a large portion code contributed by users, and is
|
---|
5928 | not supported in any way by Oracle.
|
---|
5929 | </para>
|
---|
5930 |
|
---|
5931 | <para>
|
---|
5932 | The keyboard handling is severely limited, and only the US
|
---|
5933 | keyboard layout works. Other keyboard layouts will have at least
|
---|
5934 | some keys which produce the wrong results, often with quite
|
---|
5935 | surprising effects, and for layouts which have significant
|
---|
5936 | differences to the US keyboard layout it is most likely unusable.
|
---|
5937 | </para>
|
---|
5938 |
|
---|
5939 | <para>
|
---|
5940 | It is possible to install both the &product-name; Extension Pack
|
---|
5941 | and VNC, but only one VRDE module can be active at any time. The
|
---|
5942 | following command switches to the VNC VRDE module in VNC:
|
---|
5943 | </para>
|
---|
5944 |
|
---|
5945 | <screen>VBoxManage setproperty vrdeextpack VNC</screen>
|
---|
5946 |
|
---|
5947 | <para>
|
---|
5948 | Configuring the remote access works very similarly to VRDP, see
|
---|
5949 | <xref linkend="vrde" />, with some limitations. VNC does not
|
---|
5950 | support specifying several port numbers, and the authentication is
|
---|
5951 | done differently. VNC can only deal with password authentication,
|
---|
5952 | and there is no option to use password hashes. This leaves no
|
---|
5953 | other choice than having a clear-text password in the VM
|
---|
5954 | configuration, which can be set with the following command:
|
---|
5955 | </para>
|
---|
5956 |
|
---|
5957 | <screen>VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --vrde-property VNCPassword=secret</screen>
|
---|
5958 |
|
---|
5959 | <para>
|
---|
5960 | The user is responsible for keeping this password secret, and it
|
---|
5961 | should be removed when a VM configuration is passed to another
|
---|
5962 | person, for whatever purpose. Some VNC servers claim to have
|
---|
5963 | encrypted passwords in the configuration. This is not true
|
---|
5964 | encryption, it is only concealing the passwords, which is only as
|
---|
5965 | secure as using clear-text passwords.
|
---|
5966 | </para>
|
---|
5967 |
|
---|
5968 | <para>
|
---|
5969 | The following command switches back to VRDP, if installed:
|
---|
5970 | </para>
|
---|
5971 |
|
---|
5972 | <screen>VBoxManage setproperty vrdeextpack "&product-name; Extension Pack"</screen>
|
---|
5973 |
|
---|
5974 | </sect1>
|
---|
5975 |
|
---|
5976 | <sect1 id="autostart">
|
---|
5977 |
|
---|
5978 | <title>Starting Virtual Machines During System Boot</title>
|
---|
5979 |
|
---|
5980 | <para>
|
---|
5981 | You can start VMs automatically during system boot on Linux,
|
---|
5982 | Oracle Solaris, and Mac OS X platforms for all users.
|
---|
5983 | </para>
|
---|
5984 |
|
---|
5985 | <sect2 id="autostart-linux">
|
---|
5986 |
|
---|
5987 | <title>Linux: Starting the Autostart Service With init</title>
|
---|
5988 |
|
---|
5989 | <para>
|
---|
5990 | On Linux, the autostart service is activated by setting two
|
---|
5991 | variables in <filename>/etc/default/virtualbox</filename>. The
|
---|
5992 | first one is <literal>VBOXAUTOSTART_DB</literal> which contains
|
---|
5993 | an absolute path to the autostart database directory. The
|
---|
5994 | directory should have write access for every user who should be
|
---|
5995 | able to start virtual machines automatically. Furthermore the
|
---|
5996 | directory should have the sticky bit set. The second variable is
|
---|
5997 | <literal>VBOXAUTOSTART_CONFIG</literal> which points the service
|
---|
5998 | to the autostart configuration file which is used during boot to
|
---|
5999 | determine whether to allow individual users to start a VM
|
---|
6000 | automatically and configure startup delays. The configuration
|
---|
6001 | file can be placed in <filename>/etc/vbox</filename> and
|
---|
6002 | contains several options. One is
|
---|
6003 | <literal>default_policy</literal> which controls whether the
|
---|
6004 | autostart service allows or denies to start a VM for users which
|
---|
6005 | are not in the exception list. The exception list starts with
|
---|
6006 | <literal>exception_list</literal> and contains a comma separated
|
---|
6007 | list with usernames. Furthermore a separate startup delay can be
|
---|
6008 | configured for every user to avoid overloading the host. A
|
---|
6009 | sample configuration is given below:
|
---|
6010 | </para>
|
---|
6011 |
|
---|
6012 | <screen>
|
---|
6013 | # Default policy is to deny starting a VM, the other option is "allow".
|
---|
6014 | default_policy = deny
|
---|
6015 |
|
---|
6016 | # Bob is allowed to start virtual machines but starting them
|
---|
6017 | # will be delayed for 10 seconds
|
---|
6018 | bob = {
|
---|
6019 | allow = true
|
---|
6020 | startup_delay = 10
|
---|
6021 | }
|
---|
6022 |
|
---|
6023 | # Alice is not allowed to start virtual machines, useful to exclude certain users
|
---|
6024 | # if the default policy is set to allow.
|
---|
6025 | alice = {
|
---|
6026 | allow = false
|
---|
6027 | }
|
---|
6028 | </screen>
|
---|
6029 |
|
---|
6030 | <para>
|
---|
6031 | Any user who wants to enable autostart for individual machines
|
---|
6032 | must set the path to the autostart database directory with the
|
---|
6033 | following command:
|
---|
6034 | </para>
|
---|
6035 |
|
---|
6036 | <screen>VBoxManage setproperty autostartdbpath <replaceable>autostart-directory</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6037 |
|
---|
6038 | </sect2>
|
---|
6039 |
|
---|
6040 | <sect2 id="autostart-solaris">
|
---|
6041 |
|
---|
6042 | <title>Oracle Solaris: Starting the Autostart Service With SMF</title>
|
---|
6043 |
|
---|
6044 | <para>
|
---|
6045 | On Oracle Solaris hosts, the &product-name; autostart daemon is
|
---|
6046 | integrated into the SMF framework. To enable it you must point
|
---|
6047 | the service to an existing configuration file which has the same
|
---|
6048 | format as on Linux, see <xref linkend="autostart-linux" />. For
|
---|
6049 | example:
|
---|
6050 | </para>
|
---|
6051 |
|
---|
6052 | <screen># svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/autostart:default setprop \
|
---|
6053 | config/config=/etc/vbox/autostart.cfg</screen>
|
---|
6054 |
|
---|
6055 | <para>
|
---|
6056 | When everything is configured correctly you can start the
|
---|
6057 | &product-name; autostart service with the following command:
|
---|
6058 | </para>
|
---|
6059 |
|
---|
6060 | <screen># svcadm enable svc:/application/virtualbox/autostart:default</screen>
|
---|
6061 |
|
---|
6062 | <para>
|
---|
6063 | For more information about SMF, see the Oracle Solaris
|
---|
6064 | documentation.
|
---|
6065 | </para>
|
---|
6066 |
|
---|
6067 | </sect2>
|
---|
6068 |
|
---|
6069 | <sect2 id="autostart-osx">
|
---|
6070 |
|
---|
6071 | <title>Mac OS X: Starting the Autostart Service With launchd</title>
|
---|
6072 |
|
---|
6073 | <para>
|
---|
6074 | On Mac OS X, launchd is used to start the &product-name;
|
---|
6075 | autostart service. An example configuration file can be found in
|
---|
6076 | <filename>/Applications/VirtualBox.app/Contents/MacOS/org.virtualbox.vboxautostart.plist</filename>.
|
---|
6077 | To enable the service copy the file to
|
---|
6078 | <filename>/Library/LaunchDaemons</filename> and change the
|
---|
6079 | <literal>Disabled</literal> key from <literal>true</literal> to
|
---|
6080 | <literal>false</literal>. Furthermore replace the second
|
---|
6081 | parameter to an existing configuration file which has the same
|
---|
6082 | format as on Linux, see <xref linkend="autostart-linux" />.
|
---|
6083 | </para>
|
---|
6084 |
|
---|
6085 | <para>
|
---|
6086 | To manually start the service use the following command:
|
---|
6087 | </para>
|
---|
6088 |
|
---|
6089 | <screen># launchctl load /Library/LaunchDaemons/org.virtualbox.vboxautostart.plist</screen>
|
---|
6090 |
|
---|
6091 | <para>
|
---|
6092 | For additional information on how launchd services can be
|
---|
6093 | configured see:
|
---|
6094 | </para>
|
---|
6095 |
|
---|
6096 | <para>
|
---|
6097 | <ulink
|
---|
6098 | url="http://developer.apple.com/mac/library/documentation/MacOSX/Conceptual/BPSystemStartup/BPSystemStartup.html" />.
|
---|
6099 | </para>
|
---|
6100 |
|
---|
6101 | </sect2>
|
---|
6102 |
|
---|
6103 | <sect2 id="autostart-windows">
|
---|
6104 |
|
---|
6105 | <title>Windows: Starting the Autostart Service</title>
|
---|
6106 |
|
---|
6107 | <para>
|
---|
6108 | On Windows, autostart functionality consist of two components.
|
---|
6109 | The first component is a configuration file where the
|
---|
6110 | administrator can both set a delayed start for the VMs and
|
---|
6111 | temporarily disable autostarting for a particular user. The
|
---|
6112 | configuration file should be located in a folder accessible by
|
---|
6113 | all required users but it should have permissions allowing only
|
---|
6114 | reading by everyone but administrators. The configuration file
|
---|
6115 | contains several options. The
|
---|
6116 | <literal>default_policy</literal> controls whether the autostart
|
---|
6117 | service allows or denies starting of a VM for users that are not
|
---|
6118 | in the exception list. The exception list starts with
|
---|
6119 | <literal>exception_list</literal> and contains a comma separated
|
---|
6120 | list with usernames. Furthermore, a separate startup delay can
|
---|
6121 | be configured for every user to avoid overloading the host. A
|
---|
6122 | sample configuration is given below:
|
---|
6123 | </para>
|
---|
6124 |
|
---|
6125 | <screen>
|
---|
6126 | # Default policy is to deny starting a VM, the other option is "allow".
|
---|
6127 | default_policy = deny
|
---|
6128 |
|
---|
6129 | # Bob is allowed to start virtual machines but starting them
|
---|
6130 | # will be delayed for 10 seconds
|
---|
6131 | bob = {
|
---|
6132 | allow = true
|
---|
6133 | startup_delay = 10
|
---|
6134 | }
|
---|
6135 |
|
---|
6136 | # Alice is not allowed to start virtual machines, useful to exclude certain users
|
---|
6137 | # if the default policy is set to allow.
|
---|
6138 | alice = {
|
---|
6139 | allow = false
|
---|
6140 | }
|
---|
6141 | </screen>
|
---|
6142 |
|
---|
6143 | <para>
|
---|
6144 | The user name can be specified using the following forms:
|
---|
6145 | "user", "domain\user", ".\user" and "user@domain". An
|
---|
6146 | administrator must add the
|
---|
6147 | <literal>VBOXAUTOSTART_CONFIG</literal> environment variable
|
---|
6148 | into system variables containing the path to the configuration
|
---|
6149 | file described above. The environment variable tells the
|
---|
6150 | autostart services which configuration file is used.
|
---|
6151 | </para>
|
---|
6152 |
|
---|
6153 | <para>
|
---|
6154 | The second component of autostart functionality is a Windows
|
---|
6155 | service. Every instance of this works on behalf of a particular
|
---|
6156 | user using their credentials.
|
---|
6157 | </para>
|
---|
6158 |
|
---|
6159 | <para>
|
---|
6160 | To enable autostarting for a particular user, a member of the
|
---|
6161 | administrators group must run the following command:
|
---|
6162 | </para>
|
---|
6163 |
|
---|
6164 | <screen>VBoxAutostartSvc install --user=<replaceable>user</replaceable> [--password-file=<replaceable>password_file</replaceable>]</screen>
|
---|
6165 |
|
---|
6166 | <para>
|
---|
6167 | The password file should contain the password followed by a line
|
---|
6168 | break. The rest of the file is ignored. The user will be asked
|
---|
6169 | for a password if the password file is not specified.
|
---|
6170 | </para>
|
---|
6171 |
|
---|
6172 | <para>
|
---|
6173 | To disable autostarting for particular user, a member of the
|
---|
6174 | administrators group must run the following command:
|
---|
6175 | </para>
|
---|
6176 |
|
---|
6177 | <screen>VBoxAutostartSvc delete --user=<replaceable>user</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6178 |
|
---|
6179 | <para>
|
---|
6180 | If a user has changed their password then a member of the
|
---|
6181 | administrators group must either reinstall the service or change
|
---|
6182 | the service credentials using Windows Service Manager. Due to
|
---|
6183 | Windows security policies, the autostart service cannot be
|
---|
6184 | installed for users with empty passwords.
|
---|
6185 | </para>
|
---|
6186 |
|
---|
6187 | <para>
|
---|
6188 | Finally, the user should define which VMs should be started at
|
---|
6189 | boot. The user should run the following command for every VM
|
---|
6190 | they wish to start at boot:
|
---|
6191 | </para>
|
---|
6192 |
|
---|
6193 | <screen>VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM name or UUID</replaceable> --autostart-enabled on</screen>
|
---|
6194 |
|
---|
6195 | <para>
|
---|
6196 | The user can remove a particular VM from the VMs starting at
|
---|
6197 | boot by running the following command:
|
---|
6198 | </para>
|
---|
6199 |
|
---|
6200 | <screen>VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM name or UUID</replaceable> --autostart-enabled off</screen>
|
---|
6201 |
|
---|
6202 | <note>
|
---|
6203 | <para>
|
---|
6204 | On Windows hosts, starting VMs via the autostart service might cause some
|
---|
6205 | issues, as the virtual machines are starting within the same session as
|
---|
6206 | VBoxSVC. For more information see <xref linkend="vboxsvc-session-0" />.
|
---|
6207 | </para>
|
---|
6208 | </note>
|
---|
6209 |
|
---|
6210 | </sect2>
|
---|
6211 |
|
---|
6212 | </sect1>
|
---|
6213 |
|
---|
6214 | <sect1 id="vmencryption">
|
---|
6215 |
|
---|
6216 | <title>Encryption of VMs</title>
|
---|
6217 |
|
---|
6218 | <para>
|
---|
6219 | &product-name; enables you to transparently encrypt the VM data
|
---|
6220 | stored in the configuration file, saved state and EFI boot data
|
---|
6221 | for the guest.
|
---|
6222 | </para>
|
---|
6223 |
|
---|
6224 | <para>
|
---|
6225 | &product-name; uses the AES algorithm in various modes. The selected
|
---|
6226 | mode depends on encrypting component of the VM. &product-name;
|
---|
6227 | supports 128-bit or 256-bit data encryption keys (DEK). The DEK
|
---|
6228 | is stored encrypted in the VM configuration file and is decrypted
|
---|
6229 | during VM opening.
|
---|
6230 | </para>
|
---|
6231 |
|
---|
6232 | <para>
|
---|
6233 | Since the DEK is stored as part of the VM configuration file, it
|
---|
6234 | is important that it is kept safe. Losing the DEK means that the
|
---|
6235 | data stored in the VM is lost irrecoverably. Having complete and
|
---|
6236 | up to date backups of all data related to the VM is the
|
---|
6237 | responsibility of the user.
|
---|
6238 | </para>
|
---|
6239 |
|
---|
6240 | <para>
|
---|
6241 | The VM, even if it is encrypted, may contain mediums encrypted with
|
---|
6242 | different passwords. To deal with this, the password for the VM itself
|
---|
6243 | also has password identifier such as passwords for mediums. The password
|
---|
6244 | ID is an arbitrary string which uniquely identifies the password in the
|
---|
6245 | VM and its mediums. It is allowed to use the same password for VM and
|
---|
6246 | its mediums with the same ID.
|
---|
6247 | </para>
|
---|
6248 |
|
---|
6249 | <sect2 id="vmencryption-limitations">
|
---|
6250 |
|
---|
6251 | <title>Limitations of VM Encryption</title>
|
---|
6252 |
|
---|
6253 | <para>
|
---|
6254 | There are some limitations the user needs to be aware of when
|
---|
6255 | using this feature:
|
---|
6256 | </para>
|
---|
6257 |
|
---|
6258 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
6259 |
|
---|
6260 | <listitem>
|
---|
6261 | <para>
|
---|
6262 | Exporting appliances containing encrypted VM is not
|
---|
6263 | possible because the OVF specification does not support
|
---|
6264 | this. The VM is therefore decrypted during export.
|
---|
6265 | </para>
|
---|
6266 | </listitem>
|
---|
6267 |
|
---|
6268 | <listitem>
|
---|
6269 | <para>
|
---|
6270 | The DEK is kept in memory while the VM is running to be able
|
---|
6271 | to encrypt and decrypt VM data. While this should be obvious
|
---|
6272 | the user needs to be aware of this because an attacker might
|
---|
6273 | be able to extract the key on a compromised host and decrypt
|
---|
6274 | the data.
|
---|
6275 | </para>
|
---|
6276 | </listitem>
|
---|
6277 |
|
---|
6278 | <listitem>
|
---|
6279 | <para>
|
---|
6280 | When encrypting or decrypting the VM, the password is passed
|
---|
6281 | in clear text using the &product-name; API. This needs to be
|
---|
6282 | kept in mind, especially when using third party API clients
|
---|
6283 | which make use of the webservice where the password might be
|
---|
6284 | transmitted over the network. The use of HTTPS is mandatory
|
---|
6285 | in such a case.
|
---|
6286 | </para>
|
---|
6287 | </listitem>
|
---|
6288 |
|
---|
6289 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
6290 |
|
---|
6291 | </sect2>
|
---|
6292 |
|
---|
6293 | <sect2 id="vmencryption-encryption">
|
---|
6294 |
|
---|
6295 | <title>Encrypting VMs</title>
|
---|
6296 |
|
---|
6297 | <para>
|
---|
6298 | Encrypting VMs can be done either using the GUI or
|
---|
6299 | <command>VBoxManage</command>. To encrypt an unencrypted
|
---|
6300 | VM with <command>VBoxManage</command>, use:
|
---|
6301 | </para>
|
---|
6302 |
|
---|
6303 | <screen>VBoxManage encryptvm <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>vmname</replaceable> setencryption --new-password <replaceable>filename</replaceable>|- \
|
---|
6304 | --cipher <replaceable>cipher-ID</replaceable> --new-password-id "<replaceable>ID</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6305 |
|
---|
6306 | <para>
|
---|
6307 | To supply the encryption password point
|
---|
6308 | <command>VBoxManage</command> to the file where the password is
|
---|
6309 | stored or specify <option>-</option> to let VBoxManage ask you
|
---|
6310 | for the password on the command line.
|
---|
6311 | </para>
|
---|
6312 |
|
---|
6313 | <para>
|
---|
6314 | The cipher parameter specifies the cipher to use for encryption
|
---|
6315 | and can be either <literal>AES-128</literal> or
|
---|
6316 | <literal>AES-256</literal>. Appropriate mode GCM, CTR or XTS will
|
---|
6317 | be selected by VM depending on encrypting component.
|
---|
6318 | The specified password identifier can be freely chosen by the user
|
---|
6319 | and is used for correct identification when supplying multiple
|
---|
6320 | passwords for the VM.
|
---|
6321 | </para>
|
---|
6322 |
|
---|
6323 | </sect2>
|
---|
6324 |
|
---|
6325 | <sect2 id="vmencryption-addpassword">
|
---|
6326 |
|
---|
6327 | <title>Opening the encrypted VM</title>
|
---|
6328 |
|
---|
6329 | <para>
|
---|
6330 | At the time the &product-name; has just started up the encrypted
|
---|
6331 | VM can not be opened and it stays inaccessible. Also the encrypted
|
---|
6332 | VM stays inaccessible if it just registered without password or
|
---|
6333 | password is incorrect. The user needs to provide the password
|
---|
6334 | through either GUI or <command>VBoxManage</command> using the
|
---|
6335 | following command:
|
---|
6336 | </para>
|
---|
6337 |
|
---|
6338 | <screen>VBoxManage encryptvm <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>vmname</replaceable> addpassword --password <replaceable>filename</replaceable>|- --password-id <replaceable>ID</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6339 |
|
---|
6340 | <para>
|
---|
6341 | To supply the encryption password point
|
---|
6342 | <command>VBoxManage</command> to the file where the password is
|
---|
6343 | stored or specify <option>-</option> to let VBoxManage ask you
|
---|
6344 | for the password on the command line.
|
---|
6345 | </para>
|
---|
6346 |
|
---|
6347 | <para>
|
---|
6348 | If <replaceable>ID</replaceable> is the same as the password
|
---|
6349 | identifier supplied when encrypting the VM it updates the
|
---|
6350 | accessibility state.
|
---|
6351 | </para>
|
---|
6352 |
|
---|
6353 | <para>
|
---|
6354 | If user needs to remove the entered password from the VM memory
|
---|
6355 | it can call <command>VBoxManage</command> using the following
|
---|
6356 | command:
|
---|
6357 | </para>
|
---|
6358 |
|
---|
6359 | <screen>VBoxManage encryptvm <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>vmname</replaceable> removepassword <replaceable>ID</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6360 |
|
---|
6361 | <para>
|
---|
6362 | If <replaceable>ID</replaceable> is the same as the password
|
---|
6363 | identifier supplied when encrypting the VM it updates the
|
---|
6364 | accessibility state.
|
---|
6365 | </para>
|
---|
6366 |
|
---|
6367 | <note>
|
---|
6368 | <para>
|
---|
6369 | If machine becomes inaccessible all passwords are purged.
|
---|
6370 | One has to add required passwords again using
|
---|
6371 | <command>VBoxManage encryptvm
|
---|
6372 | <replaceable>vmname</replaceable> addpassword</command>
|
---|
6373 | command, see <xref linkend="vmencryption-addpassword" />.
|
---|
6374 | </para>
|
---|
6375 | </note>
|
---|
6376 |
|
---|
6377 | </sect2>
|
---|
6378 |
|
---|
6379 | <sect2 id="vmencryption-decryption">
|
---|
6380 |
|
---|
6381 | <title>Decrypting Encrypted VMs</title>
|
---|
6382 |
|
---|
6383 | <para>
|
---|
6384 | In some circumstances it might be required to decrypt previously
|
---|
6385 | encrypted VMs. This can be done in the GUI or using
|
---|
6386 | <command>VBoxManage</command> with the following command:
|
---|
6387 | </para>
|
---|
6388 |
|
---|
6389 | <screen>VBoxManage encryptvm <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>vmname</replaceable> setencryption --old-password <replaceable>file</replaceable>|-</screen>
|
---|
6390 |
|
---|
6391 | <para>
|
---|
6392 | The only required parameter is the password the VM was
|
---|
6393 | encrypted with. The options are the same as for encrypting
|
---|
6394 | VMs.
|
---|
6395 | </para>
|
---|
6396 |
|
---|
6397 | </sect2>
|
---|
6398 |
|
---|
6399 | </sect1>
|
---|
6400 |
|
---|
6401 | <sect1 id="vboxexpertstoragemgmt">
|
---|
6402 |
|
---|
6403 | <title>&product-name; Expert Storage Management</title>
|
---|
6404 |
|
---|
6405 | <para>
|
---|
6406 | In case the snapshot model of &product-name; is not sufficient it
|
---|
6407 | is possible to enable a special mode which makes it possible to
|
---|
6408 | reconfigure storage attachments while the VM is paused. The user
|
---|
6409 | has to make sure that the disk data stays consistent to the guest
|
---|
6410 | because unlike with hotplugging the guest is not informed about
|
---|
6411 | detached or newly attached media.
|
---|
6412 | </para>
|
---|
6413 |
|
---|
6414 | <para>
|
---|
6415 | The expert storage management mode can be enabled per VM
|
---|
6416 | executing:
|
---|
6417 | </para>
|
---|
6418 |
|
---|
6419 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal2/SilentReconfigureWhilePaused" 1</screen>
|
---|
6420 |
|
---|
6421 | <para>
|
---|
6422 | You can reconfigure storage attachments later while the VM is
|
---|
6423 | paused by using the <command>VBoxManage storageattach</command>
|
---|
6424 | command.
|
---|
6425 | </para>
|
---|
6426 |
|
---|
6427 | </sect1>
|
---|
6428 |
|
---|
6429 | <sect1 id="hostpowertweaks">
|
---|
6430 |
|
---|
6431 | <title>Handling of Host Power Management Events</title>
|
---|
6432 |
|
---|
6433 | <para>
|
---|
6434 | Some host power management events are handled by &product-name;.
|
---|
6435 | The actual behavior depends on the platform:
|
---|
6436 | </para>
|
---|
6437 |
|
---|
6438 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
6439 |
|
---|
6440 | <listitem>
|
---|
6441 | <para>
|
---|
6442 | <emphasis role="bold">Host Suspends.</emphasis> This event is
|
---|
6443 | generated when the host is about to suspend, that is, the host
|
---|
6444 | saves the state to some non-volatile storage and powers off.
|
---|
6445 | </para>
|
---|
6446 |
|
---|
6447 | <para>
|
---|
6448 | This event is currently only handled on Windows hosts and Mac
|
---|
6449 | OS X hosts. When this event is generated, &product-name; will
|
---|
6450 | pause all running VMs.
|
---|
6451 | </para>
|
---|
6452 | </listitem>
|
---|
6453 |
|
---|
6454 | <listitem>
|
---|
6455 | <para>
|
---|
6456 | <emphasis role="bold">Host Resumes.</emphasis> This event is
|
---|
6457 | generated when the host woke up from the suspended state.
|
---|
6458 | </para>
|
---|
6459 |
|
---|
6460 | <para>
|
---|
6461 | This event is currently only handled on Windows hosts and Mac
|
---|
6462 | OS X hosts. When this event is generated, &product-name; will
|
---|
6463 | resume all VMs which are where paused before.
|
---|
6464 | </para>
|
---|
6465 | </listitem>
|
---|
6466 |
|
---|
6467 | <listitem>
|
---|
6468 | <para>
|
---|
6469 | <emphasis role="bold">Battery Low.</emphasis> The battery
|
---|
6470 | level reached a critical level, usually less than 5 percent
|
---|
6471 | charged.
|
---|
6472 | </para>
|
---|
6473 |
|
---|
6474 | <para>
|
---|
6475 | This event is currently only handled on Windows hosts and Mac
|
---|
6476 | OS X hosts. When this event is generated, &product-name; will
|
---|
6477 | save the state and terminate all VMs in preparation of a
|
---|
6478 | potential host powerdown.
|
---|
6479 | </para>
|
---|
6480 |
|
---|
6481 | <para>
|
---|
6482 | The behavior can be configured. By executing the following
|
---|
6483 | command, no VM is saved:
|
---|
6484 | </para>
|
---|
6485 |
|
---|
6486 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global "VBoxInternal2/SavestateOnBatteryLow" 0</screen>
|
---|
6487 |
|
---|
6488 | <para>
|
---|
6489 | This is a global setting as well as a per-VM setting. The
|
---|
6490 | per-VM value has higher precedence than the global value. The
|
---|
6491 | following command will save the state of all VMs but will not
|
---|
6492 | save the state of VM "foo":
|
---|
6493 | </para>
|
---|
6494 |
|
---|
6495 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global "VBoxInternal2/SavestateOnBatteryLow" 1
|
---|
6496 | $ VBoxManage setextradata "foo" "VBoxInternal2/SavestateOnBatteryLow" 0</screen>
|
---|
6497 |
|
---|
6498 | <para>
|
---|
6499 | The first line is actually not required as by default the
|
---|
6500 | savestate action is performed.
|
---|
6501 | </para>
|
---|
6502 | </listitem>
|
---|
6503 |
|
---|
6504 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
6505 |
|
---|
6506 | </sect1>
|
---|
6507 |
|
---|
6508 | <sect1 id="sse412passthrough">
|
---|
6509 |
|
---|
6510 | <title>Passing Through SSE4.1/SSE4.2 Instructions</title>
|
---|
6511 |
|
---|
6512 | <para>
|
---|
6513 | To provide SSE 4.1/SSE 4.2 support to guests, the host CPU has to
|
---|
6514 | implement these instruction sets. The instruction sets are exposed
|
---|
6515 | to guests by default, but it is possible to disable the
|
---|
6516 | instructions for certain guests by using the following commands:
|
---|
6517 | </para>
|
---|
6518 |
|
---|
6519 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6520 | VBoxInternal/CPUM/IsaExts/SSE4.1 0
|
---|
6521 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6522 | VBoxInternal/CPUM/IsaExts/SSE4.2 0</screen>
|
---|
6523 |
|
---|
6524 | <para>
|
---|
6525 | These are per-VM settings which are enabled by default.
|
---|
6526 | </para>
|
---|
6527 |
|
---|
6528 | </sect1>
|
---|
6529 |
|
---|
6530 | <sect1 id="hidledssync">
|
---|
6531 |
|
---|
6532 | <title>Support for Keyboard Indicator Synchronization</title>
|
---|
6533 |
|
---|
6534 | <para>
|
---|
6535 | This feature makes the host keyboard indicators (LEDs) match those
|
---|
6536 | of the VM's emulated keyboard when the machine window is active.
|
---|
6537 | It is currently implemented for Mac OS X and Windows hosts. This
|
---|
6538 | feature is enabled by default on supported host OSes. You can
|
---|
6539 | disable this feature by running the following command:
|
---|
6540 | </para>
|
---|
6541 |
|
---|
6542 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/HidLedsSync 0</screen>
|
---|
6543 |
|
---|
6544 | <para>
|
---|
6545 | This is a per-VM setting that is enabled by default.
|
---|
6546 | </para>
|
---|
6547 |
|
---|
6548 | </sect1>
|
---|
6549 |
|
---|
6550 | <sect1 id="usbtrafficcapturing">
|
---|
6551 |
|
---|
6552 | <title>Capturing USB Traffic for Selected Devices</title>
|
---|
6553 |
|
---|
6554 | <para>
|
---|
6555 | You can capture USB traffic for single USB devices or on the root
|
---|
6556 | hub level, which captures the traffic of all USB devices attached
|
---|
6557 | to the root hub. &product-name; stores the traffic in a format
|
---|
6558 | which is compatible with Wireshark. To capture the traffic of a
|
---|
6559 | specific USB device it must be attached to the VM with
|
---|
6560 | <command>VBoxManage</command> using the following command:
|
---|
6561 | </para>
|
---|
6562 |
|
---|
6563 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> usbattach <replaceable>device uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>address</replaceable> --capturefile <replaceable>filename</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6564 |
|
---|
6565 | <para>
|
---|
6566 | In order to enable capturing on the root hub use the following
|
---|
6567 | command while the VM is not running:
|
---|
6568 | </para>
|
---|
6569 |
|
---|
6570 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6571 | VBoxInternal/Devices/usb-ehci/0/LUN#0/Config/CaptureFilename <replaceable>filename</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6572 |
|
---|
6573 | <para>
|
---|
6574 | The command above enables capturing on the root hub attached to
|
---|
6575 | the EHCI controller. To enable it for the OHCI or XHCI controller
|
---|
6576 | replace <literal>usb-ehci</literal> with
|
---|
6577 | <literal>usb-ohci</literal> or <literal>usb-xhci</literal>,
|
---|
6578 | respectively.
|
---|
6579 | </para>
|
---|
6580 |
|
---|
6581 | </sect1>
|
---|
6582 |
|
---|
6583 | <sect1 id="heartbeatservice">
|
---|
6584 |
|
---|
6585 | <title>Configuring the Heartbeat Service</title>
|
---|
6586 |
|
---|
6587 | <para>
|
---|
6588 | &product-name; ships a simple heartbeat service. Once the Guest
|
---|
6589 | Additions are active, the guest sends frequent heartbeat pings to
|
---|
6590 | the host. If the guest stops sending the heartbeat pings without
|
---|
6591 | properly terminating the service, the VM process will log this
|
---|
6592 | event in the VBox.log file. In the future it might be possible to
|
---|
6593 | configure dedicated actions but for now there is only a warning in
|
---|
6594 | the log file.
|
---|
6595 | </para>
|
---|
6596 |
|
---|
6597 | <para>
|
---|
6598 | There are two parameters to configure. The <emphasis>heartbeat
|
---|
6599 | interval</emphasis> defines the time between two heartbeat pings.
|
---|
6600 | The default value is 2 seconds, that is, the heartbeat service of
|
---|
6601 | the &product-name; Guest Additions will send a heartbeat ping
|
---|
6602 | every two seconds. The value in nanoseconds can be configured like
|
---|
6603 | this:
|
---|
6604 | </para>
|
---|
6605 |
|
---|
6606 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6607 | VBoxInternal/Devices/VMMDev/0/Config/HeartbeatInterval 2000000000</screen>
|
---|
6608 |
|
---|
6609 | <para>
|
---|
6610 | The <emphasis>heartbeat timeout</emphasis> defines the time the
|
---|
6611 | host waits starting from the last heartbeat ping before it defines
|
---|
6612 | the guest as unresponsive. The default value is 2 times the
|
---|
6613 | heartbeat interval (4 seconds) and can be configured as following,
|
---|
6614 | in nanoseconds:
|
---|
6615 | </para>
|
---|
6616 |
|
---|
6617 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6618 | VBoxInternal/Devices/VMMDev/0/Config/HeartbeatTimeout 4000000000</screen>
|
---|
6619 |
|
---|
6620 | <para>
|
---|
6621 | If the heartbeat timeout expires, there will be a log message like
|
---|
6622 | <emphasis>VMMDev: HeartBeatCheckTimer: Guest seems to be
|
---|
6623 | unresponsive. Last heartbeat received 5 seconds ago.</emphasis> If
|
---|
6624 | another heartbeat ping arrives after this warning, there will be a
|
---|
6625 | log message like <emphasis>VMMDev: GuestHeartBeat: Guest is
|
---|
6626 | alive.</emphasis>
|
---|
6627 | </para>
|
---|
6628 |
|
---|
6629 | </sect1>
|
---|
6630 |
|
---|
6631 | <sect1 id="diskencryption">
|
---|
6632 |
|
---|
6633 | <title>Encryption of Disk Images</title>
|
---|
6634 |
|
---|
6635 | <para>
|
---|
6636 | &product-name; enables you to transparently encrypt the data
|
---|
6637 | stored in hard disk images for the guest. It does not depend on a
|
---|
6638 | specific image format to be used. Images which have the data
|
---|
6639 | encrypted are not portable between &product-name; and other
|
---|
6640 | virtualization software.
|
---|
6641 | </para>
|
---|
6642 |
|
---|
6643 | <para>
|
---|
6644 | &product-name; uses the AES algorithm in XTS mode and supports
|
---|
6645 | 128-bit or 256-bit data encryption keys (DEK). The DEK is stored
|
---|
6646 | encrypted in the medium properties and is decrypted during VM
|
---|
6647 | startup by entering a password which was chosen when the image was
|
---|
6648 | encrypted.
|
---|
6649 | </para>
|
---|
6650 |
|
---|
6651 | <para>
|
---|
6652 | Since the DEK is stored as part of the VM configuration file, it
|
---|
6653 | is important that it is kept safe. Losing the DEK means that the
|
---|
6654 | data stored in the disk images is lost irrecoverably. Having
|
---|
6655 | complete and up to date backups of all data related to the VM is
|
---|
6656 | the responsibility of the user.
|
---|
6657 | </para>
|
---|
6658 |
|
---|
6659 | <sect2 id="diskencryption-limitations">
|
---|
6660 |
|
---|
6661 | <title>Limitations of Disk Encryption</title>
|
---|
6662 |
|
---|
6663 | <para>
|
---|
6664 | There are some limitations the user needs to be aware of when
|
---|
6665 | using this feature:
|
---|
6666 | </para>
|
---|
6667 |
|
---|
6668 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
6669 |
|
---|
6670 | <listitem>
|
---|
6671 | <para>
|
---|
6672 | This feature is part of the &product-name; Extension Pack,
|
---|
6673 | which needs to be installed. Otherwise disk encryption is
|
---|
6674 | unavailable.
|
---|
6675 | </para>
|
---|
6676 | </listitem>
|
---|
6677 |
|
---|
6678 | <listitem>
|
---|
6679 | <para>
|
---|
6680 | Since encryption works only on the stored user data, it is
|
---|
6681 | currently not possible to check for metadata integrity of
|
---|
6682 | the disk image. Attackers might destroy data by removing or
|
---|
6683 | changing blocks of data in the image or change metadata
|
---|
6684 | items such as the disk size.
|
---|
6685 | </para>
|
---|
6686 | </listitem>
|
---|
6687 |
|
---|
6688 | <listitem>
|
---|
6689 | <para>
|
---|
6690 | Exporting appliances which contain encrypted disk images is
|
---|
6691 | not possible because the OVF specification does not support
|
---|
6692 | this. All images are therefore decrypted during export.
|
---|
6693 | </para>
|
---|
6694 | </listitem>
|
---|
6695 |
|
---|
6696 | <listitem>
|
---|
6697 | <para>
|
---|
6698 | The DEK is kept in memory while the VM is running to be able
|
---|
6699 | to decrypt data read and encrypt data written by the guest.
|
---|
6700 | While this should be obvious the user needs to be aware of
|
---|
6701 | this because an attacker might be able to extract the key on
|
---|
6702 | a compromised host and decrypt the data.
|
---|
6703 | </para>
|
---|
6704 | </listitem>
|
---|
6705 |
|
---|
6706 | <listitem>
|
---|
6707 | <para>
|
---|
6708 | When encrypting or decrypting the images, the password is
|
---|
6709 | passed in clear text using the &product-name; API. This
|
---|
6710 | needs to be kept in mind, especially when using third party
|
---|
6711 | API clients which make use of the webservice where the
|
---|
6712 | password might be transmitted over the network. The use of
|
---|
6713 | HTTPS is mandatory in such a case.
|
---|
6714 | </para>
|
---|
6715 | </listitem>
|
---|
6716 |
|
---|
6717 | <listitem>
|
---|
6718 | <para>
|
---|
6719 | Encrypting images with differencing images is only possible
|
---|
6720 | if there are no snapshots or a linear chain of snapshots.
|
---|
6721 | This limitation may be addressed in a future &product-name;
|
---|
6722 | version.
|
---|
6723 | </para>
|
---|
6724 | </listitem>
|
---|
6725 |
|
---|
6726 | <listitem>
|
---|
6727 | <para>
|
---|
6728 | The disk encryption feature can protect the content of the
|
---|
6729 | disks configured for a VM only. It does not cover any other
|
---|
6730 | data related to a VM, including saved state or the
|
---|
6731 | configuration file itself.
|
---|
6732 | </para>
|
---|
6733 | </listitem>
|
---|
6734 |
|
---|
6735 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
6736 |
|
---|
6737 | </sect2>
|
---|
6738 |
|
---|
6739 | <sect2 id="diskencryption-encryption">
|
---|
6740 |
|
---|
6741 | <title>Encrypting Disk Images</title>
|
---|
6742 |
|
---|
6743 | <para>
|
---|
6744 | Encrypting disk images can be done either using the GUI or
|
---|
6745 | <command>VBoxManage</command>. While the GUI is easier to use,
|
---|
6746 | it works on a per VM basis and encrypts all disk images attached
|
---|
6747 | to the specific VM. With <command>VBoxManage</command> one can
|
---|
6748 | encrypt individual images, including all differencing images. To
|
---|
6749 | encrypt an unencrypted medium with
|
---|
6750 | <command>VBoxManage</command>, use:
|
---|
6751 | </para>
|
---|
6752 |
|
---|
6753 | <screen>VBoxManage encryptmedium <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>filename</replaceable> \
|
---|
6754 | --newpassword <replaceable>filename</replaceable>|- --cipher <replaceable>cipher-ID</replaceable> --newpasswordid "<replaceable>ID</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6755 |
|
---|
6756 | <para>
|
---|
6757 | To supply the encryption password point
|
---|
6758 | <command>VBoxManage</command> to the file where the password is
|
---|
6759 | stored or specify <option>-</option> to let VBoxManage ask you
|
---|
6760 | for the password on the command line.
|
---|
6761 | </para>
|
---|
6762 |
|
---|
6763 | <para>
|
---|
6764 | The cipher parameter specifies the cipher to use for encryption
|
---|
6765 | and can be either <literal>AES-XTS128-PLAIN64</literal> or
|
---|
6766 | <literal>AES-XTS256-PLAIN64</literal>. The specified password
|
---|
6767 | identifier can be freely chosen by the user and is used for
|
---|
6768 | correct identification when supplying multiple passwords during
|
---|
6769 | VM startup.
|
---|
6770 | </para>
|
---|
6771 |
|
---|
6772 | <para>
|
---|
6773 | If the user uses the same password when encrypting multiple
|
---|
6774 | images and also the same password identifier, the user needs to
|
---|
6775 | supply the password only once during VM startup.
|
---|
6776 | </para>
|
---|
6777 |
|
---|
6778 | </sect2>
|
---|
6779 |
|
---|
6780 | <sect2 id="diskencryption-startvm">
|
---|
6781 |
|
---|
6782 | <title>Starting a VM with Encrypted Images</title>
|
---|
6783 |
|
---|
6784 | <para>
|
---|
6785 | When a VM is started using the GUI, a dialog will open where the
|
---|
6786 | user needs to enter all passwords for all encrypted images
|
---|
6787 | attached to the VM. If another frontend like VBoxHeadless is
|
---|
6788 | used, the VM will be paused as soon as the guest tries to access
|
---|
6789 | an encrypted disk. The user needs to provide the passwords
|
---|
6790 | through <command>VBoxManage</command> using the following
|
---|
6791 | command:
|
---|
6792 | </para>
|
---|
6793 |
|
---|
6794 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>vmname</replaceable> addencpassword <replaceable>ID</replaceable> <replaceable>password</replaceable> [--removeonsuspend yes|no]</screen>
|
---|
6795 |
|
---|
6796 | <para>
|
---|
6797 | <replaceable>ID</replaceable> must be the same as the password
|
---|
6798 | identifier supplied when encrypting the images.
|
---|
6799 | <replaceable>password</replaceable> is the password used when
|
---|
6800 | encrypting the images. Optionally, you can specify
|
---|
6801 | <option>--removeonsuspend yes|no</option> to specify whether to
|
---|
6802 | remove the password from VM memory when the VM is suspended.
|
---|
6803 | Before the VM can be resumed, the user needs to supply the
|
---|
6804 | passwords again. This is useful when a VM is suspended by a host
|
---|
6805 | suspend event and the user does not want the password to remain
|
---|
6806 | in memory.
|
---|
6807 | </para>
|
---|
6808 |
|
---|
6809 | </sect2>
|
---|
6810 |
|
---|
6811 | <sect2 id="diskencryption-decryption">
|
---|
6812 |
|
---|
6813 | <title>Decrypting Encrypted Images</title>
|
---|
6814 |
|
---|
6815 | <para>
|
---|
6816 | In some circumstances it might be required to decrypt previously
|
---|
6817 | encrypted images. This can be done in the GUI for a complete VM
|
---|
6818 | or using <command>VBoxManage</command> with the following
|
---|
6819 | command:
|
---|
6820 | </para>
|
---|
6821 |
|
---|
6822 | <screen>VBoxManage encryptmedium <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>filename</replaceable> --oldpassword <replaceable>file</replaceable>|-</screen>
|
---|
6823 |
|
---|
6824 | <para>
|
---|
6825 | The only required parameter is the password the image was
|
---|
6826 | encrypted with. The options are the same as for encrypting
|
---|
6827 | images.
|
---|
6828 | </para>
|
---|
6829 |
|
---|
6830 | </sect2>
|
---|
6831 |
|
---|
6832 | </sect1>
|
---|
6833 |
|
---|
6834 | <sect1 id="gimdebug">
|
---|
6835 |
|
---|
6836 | <title>Paravirtualized Debugging</title>
|
---|
6837 |
|
---|
6838 | <para>
|
---|
6839 | This section covers debugging of guest operating systems using
|
---|
6840 | interfaces supported by paravirtualization providers.
|
---|
6841 | </para>
|
---|
6842 |
|
---|
6843 | <note>
|
---|
6844 | <para>
|
---|
6845 | Paravirtualized debugging significantly alter guest operating
|
---|
6846 | system behaviour and should only be used by expert users for
|
---|
6847 | debugging and diagnostics.
|
---|
6848 | </para>
|
---|
6849 | </note>
|
---|
6850 |
|
---|
6851 | <para>
|
---|
6852 | These debug options are specified as a string of key-value pairs
|
---|
6853 | separated by commas. An empty string disables paravirtualized
|
---|
6854 | debugging.
|
---|
6855 | </para>
|
---|
6856 |
|
---|
6857 | <sect2 id="gimdebughyperv">
|
---|
6858 |
|
---|
6859 | <title>Hyper-V Debug Options</title>
|
---|
6860 |
|
---|
6861 | <para>
|
---|
6862 | All of the options listed below are optional, and thus the
|
---|
6863 | default value specified will be used when the corresponding
|
---|
6864 | key-value pair is not specified.
|
---|
6865 | </para>
|
---|
6866 |
|
---|
6867 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
6868 |
|
---|
6869 | <listitem>
|
---|
6870 | <para>
|
---|
6871 | Key:
|
---|
6872 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>enabled</literal></emphasis>
|
---|
6873 | </para>
|
---|
6874 |
|
---|
6875 | <para>
|
---|
6876 | Value: <literal>0</literal> or <literal>1</literal>
|
---|
6877 | </para>
|
---|
6878 |
|
---|
6879 | <para>
|
---|
6880 | Default: <literal>0</literal>
|
---|
6881 | </para>
|
---|
6882 |
|
---|
6883 | <para>
|
---|
6884 | Specify <literal>1</literal> to enable the Hyper-V debug
|
---|
6885 | interface. If this key-value pair is not specified or the
|
---|
6886 | value is not <literal>1</literal>, the Hyper-V debug
|
---|
6887 | interface is disabled regardless of other key-value pairs
|
---|
6888 | being present.
|
---|
6889 | </para>
|
---|
6890 | </listitem>
|
---|
6891 |
|
---|
6892 | <listitem>
|
---|
6893 | <para>
|
---|
6894 | Key:
|
---|
6895 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>address</literal></emphasis>
|
---|
6896 | </para>
|
---|
6897 |
|
---|
6898 | <para>
|
---|
6899 | Value: IPv4 address
|
---|
6900 | </para>
|
---|
6901 |
|
---|
6902 | <para>
|
---|
6903 | Default: 127.0.0.1
|
---|
6904 | </para>
|
---|
6905 |
|
---|
6906 | <para>
|
---|
6907 | Specify the IPv4 address where the remote debugger is
|
---|
6908 | connected.
|
---|
6909 | </para>
|
---|
6910 | </listitem>
|
---|
6911 |
|
---|
6912 | <listitem>
|
---|
6913 | <para>
|
---|
6914 | Key:
|
---|
6915 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>port</literal></emphasis>
|
---|
6916 | </para>
|
---|
6917 |
|
---|
6918 | <para>
|
---|
6919 | Value: UDP port number
|
---|
6920 | </para>
|
---|
6921 |
|
---|
6922 | <para>
|
---|
6923 | Default: 50000
|
---|
6924 | </para>
|
---|
6925 |
|
---|
6926 | <para>
|
---|
6927 | Specify the UDP port number where the remote debugger is
|
---|
6928 | connected.
|
---|
6929 | </para>
|
---|
6930 | </listitem>
|
---|
6931 |
|
---|
6932 | <listitem>
|
---|
6933 | <para>
|
---|
6934 | Key:
|
---|
6935 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>vendor</literal></emphasis>
|
---|
6936 | </para>
|
---|
6937 |
|
---|
6938 | <para>
|
---|
6939 | Value: Hyper-V vendor signature reported by CPUID to the
|
---|
6940 | guest
|
---|
6941 | </para>
|
---|
6942 |
|
---|
6943 | <para>
|
---|
6944 | Default: When debugging is enabled: <literal>Microsoft
|
---|
6945 | Hv</literal>, otherwise: <literal>VBoxVBoxVBox</literal>
|
---|
6946 | </para>
|
---|
6947 |
|
---|
6948 | <para>
|
---|
6949 | Specify the Hyper-V vendor signature which is exposed to the
|
---|
6950 | guest by CPUID. For debugging Microsoft Windows guests, it
|
---|
6951 | is required the hypervisor reports the Microsoft vendor.
|
---|
6952 | </para>
|
---|
6953 | </listitem>
|
---|
6954 |
|
---|
6955 | <listitem>
|
---|
6956 | <para>
|
---|
6957 | Key:
|
---|
6958 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>hypercallinterface</literal>
|
---|
6959 | </emphasis>
|
---|
6960 | </para>
|
---|
6961 |
|
---|
6962 | <para>
|
---|
6963 | Value: <literal>0</literal> or <literal>1</literal>
|
---|
6964 | </para>
|
---|
6965 |
|
---|
6966 | <para>
|
---|
6967 | Default: <literal>0</literal>
|
---|
6968 | </para>
|
---|
6969 |
|
---|
6970 | <para>
|
---|
6971 | Specify whether hypercalls should be suggested for
|
---|
6972 | initiating debug data transfers between host and guest
|
---|
6973 | rather than MSRs when requested by the guest.
|
---|
6974 | </para>
|
---|
6975 | </listitem>
|
---|
6976 |
|
---|
6977 | <listitem>
|
---|
6978 | <para>
|
---|
6979 | Key: <emphasis role="bold"><literal>vsinterface</literal>
|
---|
6980 | </emphasis>
|
---|
6981 | </para>
|
---|
6982 |
|
---|
6983 | <para>
|
---|
6984 | Value: <literal>0</literal> or <literal>1</literal>
|
---|
6985 | </para>
|
---|
6986 |
|
---|
6987 | <para>
|
---|
6988 | Default: When debugging is enabled, <literal>1</literal>,
|
---|
6989 | otherwise <literal>0</literal>
|
---|
6990 | </para>
|
---|
6991 |
|
---|
6992 | <para>
|
---|
6993 | Specify whether to expose the VS#1 virtualization service
|
---|
6994 | interface to the guest. This interface is required for
|
---|
6995 | debugging Microsoft Windows 10 32-bit guests, but is
|
---|
6996 | optional for other Windows versions.
|
---|
6997 | </para>
|
---|
6998 | </listitem>
|
---|
6999 |
|
---|
7000 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
7001 |
|
---|
7002 | <sect3 id="gimdebughyperv-windows-setup">
|
---|
7003 |
|
---|
7004 | <title>Setting up Windows Guests for Debugging with the Hyper-V
|
---|
7005 | Paravirtualization Provider</title>
|
---|
7006 |
|
---|
7007 | <para>
|
---|
7008 | Windows supports debugging over a serial cable, USB, IEEE 1394
|
---|
7009 | Firewire, and Ethernet. USB and IEEE 1394 are not applicable
|
---|
7010 | for virtual machines, and Ethernet requires Windows 8 or
|
---|
7011 | later. While a serial connection is universally usable, it is
|
---|
7012 | slow.
|
---|
7013 | </para>
|
---|
7014 |
|
---|
7015 | <para>
|
---|
7016 | Debugging using the Hyper-V debug transport, supported on
|
---|
7017 | Windows Vista and later, offers significant benefits. It
|
---|
7018 | provides excellent performance due to direct host-to-guest
|
---|
7019 | transfers, it is easy to set up and requires minimal support
|
---|
7020 | from the hypervisor. It can be used with the debugger running
|
---|
7021 | on the same host as the VM or with the debugger and VM on
|
---|
7022 | separate machines connected over a network.
|
---|
7023 | </para>
|
---|
7024 |
|
---|
7025 | <para>
|
---|
7026 | <emphasis role="bold">Prerequisites</emphasis>
|
---|
7027 | </para>
|
---|
7028 |
|
---|
7029 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
7030 |
|
---|
7031 | <listitem>
|
---|
7032 | <para>
|
---|
7033 | A VM configured for Hyper-V paravirtualization running a
|
---|
7034 | Windows Vista or newer Windows guest. You can check the
|
---|
7035 | effective paravirtualization provider for your VM with the
|
---|
7036 | output of the following <command>VBoxManage</command>
|
---|
7037 | command:
|
---|
7038 | </para>
|
---|
7039 |
|
---|
7040 | <screen>$ VBoxManage showvminfo <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
7041 | </listitem>
|
---|
7042 |
|
---|
7043 | <listitem>
|
---|
7044 | <para>
|
---|
7045 | A sufficiently up-to-date version of the Microsoft WinDbg
|
---|
7046 | debugger required to debug the version of Windows in your
|
---|
7047 | VM.
|
---|
7048 | </para>
|
---|
7049 | </listitem>
|
---|
7050 |
|
---|
7051 | <listitem>
|
---|
7052 | <para>
|
---|
7053 | While Windows 8 and newer Windows guests ship with Hyper-V
|
---|
7054 | debug support, Windows 7 and Vista do not. To use Hyper-V
|
---|
7055 | debugging with a Windows 7 or Vista guest, copy the file
|
---|
7056 | <filename>kdvm.dll</filename> from a Windows 8.0
|
---|
7057 | installation. This file is typically located in
|
---|
7058 | <filename>C:\Windows\System32</filename>. Copy it to the
|
---|
7059 | same location in your Windows 7/Vista guest. Make sure you
|
---|
7060 | copy the 32-bit or 64-bit version of the DLL which matches
|
---|
7061 | your guest OS.
|
---|
7062 | </para>
|
---|
7063 |
|
---|
7064 | <note>
|
---|
7065 | <para>
|
---|
7066 | Only Windows 8.0 ships <filename>kdvm.dll</filename>.
|
---|
7067 | Windows 8.1 and newer Windows versions do not.
|
---|
7068 | </para>
|
---|
7069 | </note>
|
---|
7070 | </listitem>
|
---|
7071 |
|
---|
7072 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
7073 |
|
---|
7074 | <para>
|
---|
7075 | <emphasis role="bold">VM and Guest Configuration</emphasis>
|
---|
7076 | </para>
|
---|
7077 |
|
---|
7078 | <orderedlist>
|
---|
7079 |
|
---|
7080 | <listitem>
|
---|
7081 | <para>
|
---|
7082 | Power off the VM.
|
---|
7083 | </para>
|
---|
7084 | </listitem>
|
---|
7085 |
|
---|
7086 | <listitem>
|
---|
7087 | <para>
|
---|
7088 | Enable the debug options with the following
|
---|
7089 | <command>VBoxManage</command> command:
|
---|
7090 | </para>
|
---|
7091 |
|
---|
7092 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --paravirt-debug "enabled=1"</screen>
|
---|
7093 |
|
---|
7094 | <para>
|
---|
7095 | The above command assumes your debugger will connect to
|
---|
7096 | your host machine on UDP port 50000. However, if you need
|
---|
7097 | to run the debugger on a remote machine you may specify
|
---|
7098 | the remote address and port here. For example:
|
---|
7099 | </para>
|
---|
7100 |
|
---|
7101 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
7102 | --paravirt-debug "enabled=1,address=192.168.32.1,port=55000"</screen>
|
---|
7103 |
|
---|
7104 | <para>
|
---|
7105 | See <xref linkend="gimdebughyperv" /> for the complete set
|
---|
7106 | of options.
|
---|
7107 | </para>
|
---|
7108 | </listitem>
|
---|
7109 |
|
---|
7110 | <listitem>
|
---|
7111 | <para>
|
---|
7112 | Start the VM.
|
---|
7113 | </para>
|
---|
7114 | </listitem>
|
---|
7115 |
|
---|
7116 | <listitem>
|
---|
7117 | <para>
|
---|
7118 | In the guest, start an elevated command prompt and execute
|
---|
7119 | the following commands:
|
---|
7120 | </para>
|
---|
7121 |
|
---|
7122 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
7123 |
|
---|
7124 | <listitem>
|
---|
7125 | <para>
|
---|
7126 | For a Windows 8 or newer Windows guest:
|
---|
7127 | </para>
|
---|
7128 |
|
---|
7129 | <screen>bcdedit /dbgsettings net hostip:5.5.5.5 port:50000 key:1.2.3.4</screen>
|
---|
7130 | </listitem>
|
---|
7131 |
|
---|
7132 | <listitem>
|
---|
7133 | <para>
|
---|
7134 | For a Windows 7 or Vista guest:
|
---|
7135 | </para>
|
---|
7136 |
|
---|
7137 | <screen>bcdedit /set loadoptions host_ip=5.5.5.5,host_port=50000,encryption_key=1.2.3.4</screen>
|
---|
7138 |
|
---|
7139 | <screen>bcdedit /set dbgtransport kdvm.dll</screen>
|
---|
7140 |
|
---|
7141 | <para>
|
---|
7142 | The IP address and port in the
|
---|
7143 | <command>bcdedit</command> command are ignored when
|
---|
7144 | using the Hyper-V debug transport. Any valid IP and a
|
---|
7145 | port number greater than 49151 and lower than 65536
|
---|
7146 | can be entered.
|
---|
7147 | </para>
|
---|
7148 |
|
---|
7149 | <para>
|
---|
7150 | The encryption key in the <command>bcdedit</command>
|
---|
7151 | command is relevant and must be valid. The key
|
---|
7152 | "1.2.3.4" used in the above example is valid and may
|
---|
7153 | be used if security is not a concern. If you do not
|
---|
7154 | specify any encryption key, <command>bcdedit</command>
|
---|
7155 | will generate one for you and you will need to copy
|
---|
7156 | this key to later enter in Microsoft WinDbg on the
|
---|
7157 | remote end. This encryption key is used to encrypt the
|
---|
7158 | debug data exchanged between Windows and the debugger.
|
---|
7159 | </para>
|
---|
7160 | </listitem>
|
---|
7161 |
|
---|
7162 | <listitem>
|
---|
7163 | <para>
|
---|
7164 | Run one or more of the following commands to enable
|
---|
7165 | debugging for the appropriate phase or component of
|
---|
7166 | your Windows guest:
|
---|
7167 | </para>
|
---|
7168 |
|
---|
7169 | <screen>bcdedit /set debug on</screen>
|
---|
7170 |
|
---|
7171 | <screen>bcdedit /set bootdebug on</screen>
|
---|
7172 |
|
---|
7173 | <screen>bcdedit /set {bootmgr} bootdebug on</screen>
|
---|
7174 |
|
---|
7175 | <para>
|
---|
7176 | Please note that the <command>bootdebug</command>
|
---|
7177 | options are only effective on Windows 8 or newer when
|
---|
7178 | using the Hyper-V debug transport. Refer to Microsoft
|
---|
7179 | Windows documentation for detailed explanation of
|
---|
7180 | <command>bcdedit</command> options.
|
---|
7181 | </para>
|
---|
7182 | </listitem>
|
---|
7183 |
|
---|
7184 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
7185 | </listitem>
|
---|
7186 |
|
---|
7187 | <listitem>
|
---|
7188 | <para>
|
---|
7189 | Start Microsoft WinDbg on your host machine or remote
|
---|
7190 | host.
|
---|
7191 | </para>
|
---|
7192 |
|
---|
7193 | <para>
|
---|
7194 | From the <emphasis role="bold">File</emphasis> menu,
|
---|
7195 | select <emphasis role="bold">Kernel Debug</emphasis>. On
|
---|
7196 | the <emphasis role="bold">NET</emphasis> tab, specify the
|
---|
7197 | UDP port number you used in the
|
---|
7198 | <literal>paravirtdebug</literal> options. If you did not
|
---|
7199 | specify any, leave it as 50000. Ensure that the UDP port
|
---|
7200 | is not blocked by a firewall or other security software.
|
---|
7201 | </para>
|
---|
7202 |
|
---|
7203 | <para>
|
---|
7204 | In the <emphasis role="bold">Key</emphasis> field, enter
|
---|
7205 | <literal>1.2.3.4</literal> or the encryption key from the
|
---|
7206 | <command>bcdedit</command> command in your Windows guest.
|
---|
7207 | </para>
|
---|
7208 |
|
---|
7209 | <para>
|
---|
7210 | Click <emphasis role="bold">OK</emphasis> to start
|
---|
7211 | listening for connections. Microsoft WinDbg typically
|
---|
7212 | shows a Waiting to Reconnect message during this phase.
|
---|
7213 | </para>
|
---|
7214 |
|
---|
7215 | <para>
|
---|
7216 | Alternatively, to directly start a debug session, run
|
---|
7217 | WinDbg from the command line as follows :
|
---|
7218 | </para>
|
---|
7219 |
|
---|
7220 | <screen>windbg.exe -k net:port=50000,key=1.2.3.4</screen>
|
---|
7221 |
|
---|
7222 | <para>
|
---|
7223 | See the WinDbg documentation for the complete command line
|
---|
7224 | syntax.
|
---|
7225 | </para>
|
---|
7226 | </listitem>
|
---|
7227 |
|
---|
7228 | <listitem>
|
---|
7229 | <para>
|
---|
7230 | Reboot your Windows guest and it should then connect as a
|
---|
7231 | debuggee with Microsoft WinDbg.
|
---|
7232 | </para>
|
---|
7233 | </listitem>
|
---|
7234 |
|
---|
7235 | </orderedlist>
|
---|
7236 |
|
---|
7237 | </sect3>
|
---|
7238 |
|
---|
7239 | </sect2>
|
---|
7240 |
|
---|
7241 | </sect1>
|
---|
7242 |
|
---|
7243 | <sect1 id="pcspeaker_passthrough">
|
---|
7244 |
|
---|
7245 | <title>PC Speaker Passthrough</title>
|
---|
7246 |
|
---|
7247 | <para>
|
---|
7248 | As an experimental feature, primarily due to being limited to
|
---|
7249 | Linux host only and unknown Linux distribution coverage,
|
---|
7250 | &product-name; supports passing through the PC speaker to the
|
---|
7251 | host. The PC speaker, sometimes called the system speaker, is a
|
---|
7252 | way to produce audible feedback such as beeps without the need for
|
---|
7253 | regular audio and sound card support.
|
---|
7254 | </para>
|
---|
7255 |
|
---|
7256 | <para>
|
---|
7257 | The PC speaker passthrough feature in &product-name; handles beeps
|
---|
7258 | only. Advanced PC speaker use by the VM, such as PCM audio, will
|
---|
7259 | not work, resulting in undefined host behavior.
|
---|
7260 | </para>
|
---|
7261 |
|
---|
7262 | <para>
|
---|
7263 | Producing beeps on Linux is a very complex topic. &product-name;
|
---|
7264 | offers a collection of options, in an attempt to make this work
|
---|
7265 | deterministically and reliably on as many Linux distributions and
|
---|
7266 | system configurations as possible. These are summarized in the
|
---|
7267 | following table.
|
---|
7268 | </para>
|
---|
7269 |
|
---|
7270 | <table id="table-pcspeaker-config" tabstyle="oracle-all">
|
---|
7271 | <title>PC Speaker Configuration Options</title>
|
---|
7272 | <tgroup cols="3">
|
---|
7273 | <thead>
|
---|
7274 | <row>
|
---|
7275 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7276 | <emphasis role="bold">Code</emphasis>
|
---|
7277 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7278 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7279 | <emphasis role="bold">Device</emphasis>
|
---|
7280 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7281 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7282 | <emphasis role="bold">Notes</emphasis>
|
---|
7283 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7284 | </row>
|
---|
7285 | </thead>
|
---|
7286 | <tbody>
|
---|
7287 | <row>
|
---|
7288 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7289 | 1
|
---|
7290 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7291 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7292 | <filename>/dev/input/by-path/platform-pcspkr-event-spkr</filename>
|
---|
7293 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7294 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7295 | Direct host PC speaker use.
|
---|
7296 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7297 | </row>
|
---|
7298 | <row>
|
---|
7299 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7300 | 2
|
---|
7301 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7302 | <entry><filename>/dev/tty</filename></entry>
|
---|
7303 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7304 | Uses the terminal association of the VM process. VM
|
---|
7305 | needs to be started on a virtual console.
|
---|
7306 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7307 | </row>
|
---|
7308 | <row>
|
---|
7309 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7310 | 3
|
---|
7311 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7312 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7313 | <filename>/dev/tty0</filename> or
|
---|
7314 | <filename>/dev/vc/0</filename>
|
---|
7315 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7316 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7317 | Can only be used by user <literal>root</literal> or
|
---|
7318 | users with <literal>cap_sys_tty_config</literal>
|
---|
7319 | capability.
|
---|
7320 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7321 | </row>
|
---|
7322 | <row>
|
---|
7323 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7324 | 9
|
---|
7325 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7326 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7327 | A user-specified console or evdev device path.
|
---|
7328 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7329 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7330 | As for codes 1 to 3, but with a custom device path.
|
---|
7331 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7332 | </row>
|
---|
7333 | <row>
|
---|
7334 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7335 | 70
|
---|
7336 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7337 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7338 | <filename>/dev/tty</filename>
|
---|
7339 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7340 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7341 | Standard beep only. Loses frequency and length. See code
|
---|
7342 | 2.
|
---|
7343 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7344 | </row>
|
---|
7345 | <row>
|
---|
7346 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7347 | 79
|
---|
7348 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7349 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7350 | A user-specified terminal device path.
|
---|
7351 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7352 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7353 | As for code 70, but with a custom device path.
|
---|
7354 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7355 | </row>
|
---|
7356 | <row>
|
---|
7357 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7358 | 100
|
---|
7359 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7360 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7361 | All of the above.
|
---|
7362 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7363 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7364 | Tries all the available codes.
|
---|
7365 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7366 | </row>
|
---|
7367 | </tbody>
|
---|
7368 | </tgroup>
|
---|
7369 | </table>
|
---|
7370 |
|
---|
7371 | <para>
|
---|
7372 | To enable PC speaker passthrough use the following command:
|
---|
7373 | </para>
|
---|
7374 |
|
---|
7375 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/Devices/i8254/0/Config/PassthroughSpeaker" <replaceable>N</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
7376 |
|
---|
7377 | <para>
|
---|
7378 | Replace <replaceable>N</replaceable> with the code representing
|
---|
7379 | the case you want to use. Changing this setting takes effect when
|
---|
7380 | you next start the VM. It is safe to enable PC speaker passthrough
|
---|
7381 | on all host OSes. It will only have an effect on Linux.
|
---|
7382 | </para>
|
---|
7383 |
|
---|
7384 | <para>
|
---|
7385 | The VM log file, <filename>VBox.log</filename>, contains lines
|
---|
7386 | with the prefix <literal>PIT: speaker:</literal> showing the PC
|
---|
7387 | speaker passthrough setup activities. It gives hints which device
|
---|
7388 | it picked or why it failed.
|
---|
7389 | </para>
|
---|
7390 |
|
---|
7391 | <para>
|
---|
7392 | Enabling PC speaker passthrough for the VM is usually the simple
|
---|
7393 | part. The real difficulty is making sure that &product-name; can
|
---|
7394 | access the necessary device, because in a typical Linux install
|
---|
7395 | most of them can only be accessed by user <literal>root</literal>.
|
---|
7396 | You should follow the preferred way to persistently change this,
|
---|
7397 | such as by referring to your distribution's documentation. Since
|
---|
7398 | there are countless Linux distribution variants, we can only give
|
---|
7399 | the general hints that there is often a way to give the X11
|
---|
7400 | session user access to additional devices, or you need to find a
|
---|
7401 | working solution using a udev configuration file. If everything
|
---|
7402 | fails you might try setting the permissions using a script which
|
---|
7403 | is run late enough in the host system startup.
|
---|
7404 | </para>
|
---|
7405 |
|
---|
7406 | <para>
|
---|
7407 | Sometimes additional rules are applied by the kernel to limit
|
---|
7408 | access. For example, that the VM process must have the same
|
---|
7409 | controlling terminal as the device configured to be used for
|
---|
7410 | beeping, something which is often very difficult to achieve for
|
---|
7411 | GUI applications such as &product-name;. The table above contains
|
---|
7412 | some hints, but in general refer to the Linux documentation.
|
---|
7413 | </para>
|
---|
7414 |
|
---|
7415 | <para>
|
---|
7416 | If you have trouble getting any beeps even if the device
|
---|
7417 | permissions are set up and VBox.log confirms that it uses evdev or
|
---|
7418 | console for the PC speaker control, check if your system has a PC
|
---|
7419 | speaker. Some systems do not have one. Other complications can
|
---|
7420 | arise from Linux rerouting the PC speaker output to a sound card.
|
---|
7421 | Check if the beeps are audible if you connect speakers to your
|
---|
7422 | sound card. Today almost all systems have one. Finally, check if
|
---|
7423 | the audio mixer control has a channel named "beep", which could be
|
---|
7424 | hidden in the mixer settings, and that it is not muted.
|
---|
7425 | </para>
|
---|
7426 |
|
---|
7427 | </sect1>
|
---|
7428 |
|
---|
7429 | <sect1 id="usbip">
|
---|
7430 |
|
---|
7431 | <title>Accessing USB devices Exposed Over the Network with USB/IP</title>
|
---|
7432 |
|
---|
7433 | <para>
|
---|
7434 | &product-name; supports passing through USB devices which are
|
---|
7435 | exposed over the network using the USB over IP protocol without
|
---|
7436 | the need to configure the client side provided by the kernel and
|
---|
7437 | usbip tools. Furthermore, this feature works with &product-name;
|
---|
7438 | running on any supported host, rather than just Linux alone, as is
|
---|
7439 | the case with the official client.
|
---|
7440 | </para>
|
---|
7441 |
|
---|
7442 | <para>
|
---|
7443 | To enable support for passing through USB/IP devices, use the
|
---|
7444 | following command to add the device server that exports the
|
---|
7445 | devices:
|
---|
7446 | </para>
|
---|
7447 |
|
---|
7448 | <screen>VBoxManage usbdevsource add <replaceable>unique-name</replaceable> --backend <replaceable>USBIP</replaceable> --address <replaceable>device-server</replaceable>[:<replaceable>port</replaceable>]</screen>
|
---|
7449 |
|
---|
7450 | <para>
|
---|
7451 | USB devices exported on the device server are then accessible
|
---|
7452 | through the GUI or <command>VBoxManage</command>, like any USB
|
---|
7453 | devices attached locally. This can be used multiple times to
|
---|
7454 | access different device servers.
|
---|
7455 | </para>
|
---|
7456 |
|
---|
7457 | <para>
|
---|
7458 | To remove a device server, the following command can be used:
|
---|
7459 | </para>
|
---|
7460 |
|
---|
7461 | <screen>$ VBoxManage usbdevsource remove <replaceable>unique-name</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
7462 |
|
---|
7463 | <sect2 id="usbip-setup-server">
|
---|
7464 |
|
---|
7465 | <title>Setting up USB/IP Support on a Linux System</title>
|
---|
7466 |
|
---|
7467 | <para>
|
---|
7468 | This section gives a brief overview on how to set up a Linux
|
---|
7469 | based system to act as a USB device server. The system on the
|
---|
7470 | server requires that the <filename>usbip-core.ko</filename> and
|
---|
7471 | <filename>usbip-host.ko</filename> kernel drivers are available,
|
---|
7472 | and that the USB/IP tools package is installed. The particular
|
---|
7473 | installation method for the necessary tools depends on which
|
---|
7474 | distribution is used. For example, for Debian based systems, use
|
---|
7475 | the following command to install the required tools:
|
---|
7476 | </para>
|
---|
7477 |
|
---|
7478 | <screen>$ apt-get install usbip-utils</screen>
|
---|
7479 |
|
---|
7480 | <para>
|
---|
7481 | To check whether the necessary tools are already installed use
|
---|
7482 | the following command:
|
---|
7483 | </para>
|
---|
7484 |
|
---|
7485 | <screen>
|
---|
7486 | $ usbip list -l
|
---|
7487 | </screen>
|
---|
7488 |
|
---|
7489 | <para>
|
---|
7490 | This should produce output similar to that shown in the example
|
---|
7491 | below:
|
---|
7492 | </para>
|
---|
7493 |
|
---|
7494 | <screen>
|
---|
7495 | - busid 4-2 (0bda:0301)
|
---|
7496 | Realtek Semiconductor Corp. : multicard reader (0bda:0301)
|
---|
7497 |
|
---|
7498 | - busid 5-1 (046d:c52b)
|
---|
7499 | Logitech, Inc. : Unifying Receiver (046d:c52b)
|
---|
7500 | </screen>
|
---|
7501 |
|
---|
7502 | <para>
|
---|
7503 | If everything is installed, the USB/IP server needs to be
|
---|
7504 | started as <literal>root</literal> using the following command:
|
---|
7505 | </para>
|
---|
7506 |
|
---|
7507 | <screen># usbipd -D</screen>
|
---|
7508 |
|
---|
7509 | <para>
|
---|
7510 | See the documentation for the installed distribution to
|
---|
7511 | determine how to start the service when the system boots.
|
---|
7512 | </para>
|
---|
7513 |
|
---|
7514 | <para>
|
---|
7515 | By default, no device on the server is exported. This must be
|
---|
7516 | done manually for each device. To export a device use the
|
---|
7517 | following command:
|
---|
7518 | </para>
|
---|
7519 |
|
---|
7520 | <screen># usbip bind -b "bus identifier"</screen>
|
---|
7521 |
|
---|
7522 | <para>
|
---|
7523 | To export the multicard reader in the previous example:
|
---|
7524 | </para>
|
---|
7525 |
|
---|
7526 | <screen># usbip bind -b 4-2</screen>
|
---|
7527 |
|
---|
7528 | </sect2>
|
---|
7529 |
|
---|
7530 | <sect2 id="usbip-security">
|
---|
7531 |
|
---|
7532 | <title>Security Considerations</title>
|
---|
7533 |
|
---|
7534 | <para>
|
---|
7535 | The communication between the server and client is unencrypted
|
---|
7536 | and there is no authorization required to access exported
|
---|
7537 | devices. An attacker might sniff sensitive data or gain control
|
---|
7538 | over a device. To mitigate this risk, the device should be
|
---|
7539 | exposed over a local network to which only trusted clients have
|
---|
7540 | access. To access the device remotely over a public network, a
|
---|
7541 | VPN solution should be used to provide the required level of
|
---|
7542 | security protection.
|
---|
7543 | </para>
|
---|
7544 |
|
---|
7545 | </sect2>
|
---|
7546 |
|
---|
7547 | </sect1>
|
---|
7548 |
|
---|
7549 | <sect1 id="hyperv-support">
|
---|
7550 |
|
---|
7551 | <title>Using Hyper-V with &product-name;</title>
|
---|
7552 |
|
---|
7553 | <para>
|
---|
7554 | &product-name; can be used on a Windows host where Hyper-V is
|
---|
7555 | running. This is an experimental feature.
|
---|
7556 | </para>
|
---|
7557 |
|
---|
7558 | <para>
|
---|
7559 | No configuration is required. &product-name; detects Hyper-V
|
---|
7560 | automatically and uses Hyper-V as the virtualization engine for
|
---|
7561 | the host system. The CPU icon in the VM window status bar
|
---|
7562 | indicates that Hyper-V is being used.
|
---|
7563 | </para>
|
---|
7564 |
|
---|
7565 | <note>
|
---|
7566 | <para>
|
---|
7567 | When using this feature, some host systems might experience
|
---|
7568 | significant &product-name; performance degradation.
|
---|
7569 | </para>
|
---|
7570 | </note>
|
---|
7571 |
|
---|
7572 | </sect1>
|
---|
7573 |
|
---|
7574 | <sect1 id="nested-virt">
|
---|
7575 |
|
---|
7576 | <title>Nested Virtualization</title>
|
---|
7577 |
|
---|
7578 | <para>
|
---|
7579 | &product-name; supports <emphasis>nested
|
---|
7580 | virtualization</emphasis>. This feature enables the passthrough of
|
---|
7581 | hardware virtualization functions to the guest VM. That means that
|
---|
7582 | you can install a hypervisor, such as &product-name;, Oracle VM
|
---|
7583 | Server or KVM, on an &product-name; guest. You can then create and
|
---|
7584 | run VMs within the guest VM.
|
---|
7585 | </para>
|
---|
7586 |
|
---|
7587 | <para>
|
---|
7588 | Hardware virtualization features not present on the host CPU will
|
---|
7589 | not be exposed to the guest. In addition, some features such as
|
---|
7590 | nested paging are not yet supported for passthrough to the guest.
|
---|
7591 | </para>
|
---|
7592 |
|
---|
7593 | <para>
|
---|
7594 | You can enable the nested virtualization feature in one of the
|
---|
7595 | following ways:
|
---|
7596 | </para>
|
---|
7597 |
|
---|
7598 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
7599 |
|
---|
7600 | <listitem>
|
---|
7601 | <para>
|
---|
7602 | From the VirtualBox Manager, select the
|
---|
7603 | <emphasis role="bold">Enable Nested VT-x/AMD-V</emphasis>
|
---|
7604 | check box on the <emphasis role="bold">Processor</emphasis>
|
---|
7605 | tab. To disable the feature, deselect the check box.
|
---|
7606 | </para>
|
---|
7607 | </listitem>
|
---|
7608 |
|
---|
7609 | <listitem>
|
---|
7610 | <para>
|
---|
7611 | Use the <option>--nested-hw-virt</option> option of the
|
---|
7612 | <command>VBoxManage modifyvm</command> command to enable or
|
---|
7613 | disable nested virtualization. See
|
---|
7614 | <xref linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm"/>.
|
---|
7615 | </para>
|
---|
7616 | </listitem>
|
---|
7617 |
|
---|
7618 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
7619 |
|
---|
7620 | </sect1>
|
---|
7621 |
|
---|
7622 | <sect1 id="vboxsvc-session-0">
|
---|
7623 |
|
---|
7624 | <title>VBoxSVC running in Windows session 0</title>
|
---|
7625 |
|
---|
7626 | <para>
|
---|
7627 | &product-name; supports executing the VBoxSVC in Windows session 0.
|
---|
7628 | This allows VBoxSVC to run like a regular Windows service, which in turn
|
---|
7629 | enables headless VMs to continue running even if the user logs out.
|
---|
7630 | <note>
|
---|
7631 | <para>This feature currently is marked as being <emphasis role="bold">experimental</emphasis>!</para>
|
---|
7632 | </note>
|
---|
7633 | </para>
|
---|
7634 |
|
---|
7635 | <para>
|
---|
7636 | The feature is disabled by default and can be enabled by creating a REG_DWORD
|
---|
7637 | value <literal>ServerSession0</literal> in the key
|
---|
7638 | <literal>HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Oracle\VirtualBox\VBoxSDS</literal> of the
|
---|
7639 | Windows registry. Specifying <literal>1</literal> as the value's data to
|
---|
7640 | enable the feature, or <literal>0</literal> to disable the feature again.
|
---|
7641 | A host reboot is needed in order to make the change effective.
|
---|
7642 | </para>
|
---|
7643 |
|
---|
7644 | <sect2 id="vboxsvc-session-0-known-issues">
|
---|
7645 |
|
---|
7646 | <title>Known issues</title>
|
---|
7647 |
|
---|
7648 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
7649 | <listitem>
|
---|
7650 | <para>
|
---|
7651 | Due to different Windows sessions having their own set of resources,
|
---|
7652 | there might be some issues with accessing network shares created in
|
---|
7653 | the interactive user session when at least one of &product-name;
|
---|
7654 | processes are running in session 0.
|
---|
7655 | </para>
|
---|
7656 | <para>
|
---|
7657 | For accessing network shares within session 0, a possible workaround
|
---|
7658 | is to establish permanent access to the share and restart the host after that.
|
---|
7659 | This might change in the future, however.
|
---|
7660 | </para>
|
---|
7661 | </listitem>
|
---|
7662 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
7663 | </sect2>
|
---|
7664 |
|
---|
7665 | </sect1>
|
---|
7666 |
|
---|
7667 | <xi:include href="user_isomakercmd-man.xml" xpointer="element(/1)" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
|
---|
7668 |
|
---|
7669 | </chapter>
|
---|